JP6842527B2 - Liquid crystal display device - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to goods, methods, or methods of producing goods. In particular, it relates to a display device or a semiconductor device. Further, the present invention relates to an electronic device having the display device in the display unit.

Liquid crystal display devices are used in many electric products such as mobile phones and television receivers, and many studies have been conducted for further improvement in quality.

The liquid crystal display device has the advantages of being smaller and lighter than the CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) and having low power consumption, but has the problem of a narrow viewing angle. In recent years, many studies have been conducted on the multi-domain method, that is, the orientation division method, in order to improve the viewing angle characteristics. For example, the MVA method (Multi-domain Vertical Al), which is a combination of the VA method (Vertical Alignment method) and the multi-domain method.
ignment; multi-domain vertical orientation method) and PVA method (Patterned method)
Vertical Alignment (pattern type vertical orientation method) and the like.

Further, research has been conducted in which one pixel is divided into a plurality of sub-pixels and the orientation state of the liquid crystal in each sub-pixel is changed to improve the viewing angle (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-276582

However, its viewing angle characteristics are not sufficient, and further improvement is required as a display device. Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a higher quality display device having excellent viewing angle characteristics.

FIG. 77 shows an equivalent circuit diagram of one pixel of the liquid crystal display device described in Patent Document 1. Figure 7
The pixel shown in 7 has a TFT 30, a liquid crystal capacity L1, a liquid crystal capacity L2, a holding capacity C1, and a holding capacity C2, and is connected to a scanning line 3a and a data line (signal line) 6a.

Although the liquid crystal exhibits voltage holding characteristics, its holding rate is not 100%, and there is a concern about the existence of a leak due to the flow of electric charge through the liquid crystal. In the pixel shown in FIG. 77, when a leak occurs, the state in which the potential is kept constant by the charge conservation law in the portion closed by the holding capacity C1, the holding capacity C2, and the liquid crystal capacity L2 at the node 11 is lost. , The potential of the node 11 is far from the potential in the initial state before the leak occurs. Therefore, the transmittance of the liquid crystal capacity L2 is
It changes from the image signal written on the data line 6a, that is, the transmittance determined by the potential according to the gradation. As a result, it becomes impossible to obtain a desired gradation, or the image quality deteriorates. In this way, the display quality gradually deteriorates with the passage of time. Therefore, the life of the product is shortened. In particular, a display device in the normally black mode cannot display black, which causes a decrease in contrast.

In view of the above problems, it is an object of the present invention to realize a wide viewing angle display. Another object of the present invention is to provide a display device having excellent contrast. Another object of the present invention is to provide a display device having excellent display quality. Another object of the present invention is to provide a display device that is not easily affected by noise and can perform a beautiful display. Another object of the present invention is to provide a display device in which display deterioration is unlikely to occur. Another object of the present invention is to provide a display device having an excellent product life.

One of the present inventions includes a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, a first resistor, a second resistor, a first liquid crystal element, and a second liquid crystal element. Each of the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element having a included pixel is composed of at least a pixel electrode, a common electrode, and a liquid crystal controlled by the pixel electrode and the common electrode. The pixel electrode of the liquid crystal element of 1 is
It is electrically connected to the first wiring via the first switch, and the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element is the second liquid crystal element via the second switch and the first resistor. The pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element, and is electrically connected to the second wiring via the third switch and the second resistor. It is a liquid crystal display device.

One of the present invention includes a first switch, a second switch, a third switch, a first resistor, a second resistor, a first liquid crystal element, and a second liquid crystal element. Each of the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element has a pixel including a first holding capacity and a second holding capacity, and each of the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element has at least a pixel electrode, a common electrode, the pixel electrode, and the said The pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the first wiring via the first switch, and is composed of a liquid crystal controlled by a common electrode. The electrode is electrically connected to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element via the second switch and the first resistor, and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is the third switch and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element. It is electrically connected to the second wiring via the second resistor, and the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the second wiring via the first holding capacitance. The pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is formed by the second holding capacitance.
It is a liquid crystal display device characterized by being electrically connected to the wiring of the above.

One of the present invention is a liquid crystal display device, characterized in that, in the above configuration, the resistance value of the second resistor is larger than the resistance value of the first resistor.

One of the present invention includes a switch, a first transistor, a second transistor, a first liquid crystal element, a second liquid crystal element, a first holding capacity, and a second holding capacity. Has pixels,
Each of the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element has at least a pixel electrode, a common electrode, and the like.
The pixel electrode is composed of the pixel electrode and the liquid crystal controlled by the common electrode, and the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the first wiring via the switch, and the first liquid crystal element. The pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element via the first transistor, and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is connected to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element via the second transistor. The pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the second wiring through the first holding capacitance, and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the second wiring. Is a liquid crystal display device characterized in that it is electrically connected to the second wiring via the second holding capacity.

One of the present invention is a first transistor, a second transistor, a third transistor, a first liquid crystal element, a second liquid crystal element, a first holding capacity, and a second holding capacity. Each of the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element is composed of at least a pixel electrode, a common electrode, and a liquid crystal controlled by the pixel electrode and the common electrode. The pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the first wiring via the third transistor, and the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element is connected to the first wiring via the first transistor. The pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element, and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is electrically connected to the second wiring via the second transistor. The pixel electrode of the element is electrically connected to the second wiring via the first holding capacitance, and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element is connected to the second wiring via the second holding capacitance. It is a liquid crystal display device characterized by being electrically connected to the wiring of the above.

In one of the present inventions, where the channel width of the transistor is W and the channel length is L in the above configuration, the W / L of the third transistor is more than the W / L of the first transistor or the second transistor. It is a liquid crystal display device characterized by being small.

Further, one of the present inventions is characterized in that, when the channel width of the transistor is W and the channel length is L in the above configuration, the W / L of the second transistor is larger than the W / L of the first transistor. It is a liquid crystal display device.

The display device of the present invention is, for example, a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting device having a light emitting element typified by an organic light emitting element (OLED) in each pixel, and a DMD (Digital Micromirror).
Device), PDP (Plasma Display Panel), FED (F)
Active matrix type display devices such as field Emission Display) are included in the category. It also includes a passive matrix type display device.

As the switch, various forms can be used. Examples include electrical switches and mechanical switches. In other words, it suffices if the current flow can be controlled.
Not limited to specific ones. For example, as a switch, a transistor (for example, a bipolar transistor, a MOS transistor, etc.), a diode (for example, a PN diode, P)
IN diode, Schottky diode, MIM (Metal Insulator)
Metal) Diode, MIS (Metal Insulator Semicond)
octor) Diode, diode-connected transistor, etc.), thyristor, etc. can be used. Alternatively, a logic circuit combining these can be used as a switch.

An example of a mechanical switch is the Digital Micromirror Device (DMD).
There are switches that use MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical Systems) technology. The switch has electrodes that can be moved mechanically, and the movement of the electrodes controls connection and disconnection.

When a transistor is used as a switch, the polarity (conductive type) of the transistor is not particularly limited because the transistor operates as a mere switch. However, when it is desired to suppress the off-current, it is desirable to use a transistor having the polarity with the smaller off-current. Examples of the transistor having a small off-current include a transistor having an LDD region and a transistor having a multi-gate structure. Alternatively, when the potential of the source terminal of the transistor operated as a switch operates in a state close to the potential of the low potential side power supply (Vss, GND, 0V, etc.), it is desirable to use an N-channel transistor. On the contrary, when the potential of the source terminal operates in a state close to the potential of the high potential side power supply (Vdd or the like), it is desirable to use a P-channel transistor. This is because, in the N-channel transistor, when the source terminal operates near the potential of the low-potential side power supply, and in the P-channel transistor, when the source terminal operates near the potential of the high-potential side power supply, the gate and the source This is because it is easy to operate as a switch because the absolute value of the voltage between them can be increased. Further, since the source follower operation is rarely performed, the magnitude of the output voltage is unlikely to be small.

CMOS using both N-channel transistor and P-channel transistor
A type switch may be used as a switch. In a CMOS type switch, if either a P-channel transistor or an N-channel transistor conducts, a current flows, so that the switch can easily function as a switch. For example, the voltage can be appropriately output regardless of whether the voltage of the input signal to the switch is high or low. Further, since the voltage amplitude value of the signal for turning the switch on and off can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

When a transistor is used as the switch, the switch has an input terminal (one of the source terminal and the drain terminal), an output terminal (the other of the source terminal and the drain terminal), and a terminal (gate terminal) for controlling conduction. doing. On the other hand, when a diode is used as the switch, the switch may not have a terminal for controlling conduction. Therefore, using a diode as a switch rather than a transistor can reduce the wiring for controlling the terminals.

When it is explicitly stated that A and B are connected, there are cases where A and B are electrically connected and cases where A and B are functionally connected. , A and B are directly connected to each other. Here, it is assumed that A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.). Therefore, a given connection relationship,
For example, it is not limited to the connection relationship shown in the figure or text, but includes other than the connection relationship shown in the figure or text.

For example, when A and B are electrically connected, an element (for example, a switch, a transistor, a capacitive element, an inductor, a resistance element, a diode, etc.) that enables an electrical connection between A and B is , One or more may be arranged between A and B. Alternatively, assuming that A and B are functionally connected, a circuit (for example, a logic circuit (inverter, NAND circuit, NOR circuit, etc.)) or a signal conversion circuit that enables functional connection between A and B. (DA conversion circuit, AD conversion circuit, gamma correction circuit, etc.), Potential level conversion circuit (power supply circuit (boost circuit, booster circuit, etc.)
Step-down circuit, etc.), level shifter circuit that changes the potential level of the signal, etc.), voltage source, current source,
Switching circuit, amplifier circuit (circuit that can increase signal amplitude or current amount, operational amplifier,
A differential amplifier circuit, a source follower circuit, a buffer circuit, etc.), a signal generation circuit, a storage circuit, a control circuit, etc.) may be arranged one or more between A and B. Alternatively, assuming that A and B are directly connected, A and B are not sandwiched between A and B with other elements or other circuits.
And may be directly connected.

When it is explicitly stated that A and B are directly connected, it means that A and B are directly connected (that is, another element or another circuit between A and B). When A and B are electrically connected (that is, when they are connected without intervening) and when A and B are connected by sandwiching another element or another circuit between A and B. If there is) and.

When it is explicitly stated that A and B are electrically connected, it means that A and B are electrically connected (that is, another element between A and B). When A and B are functionally connected (that is, when they are connected by sandwiching another circuit) and when A and B are functionally connected (that is, when they are functionally connected by sandwiching another circuit between A and B). When A and B are directly connected (that is, when another element or another circuit is not sandwiched between A and B). In other words, the case of explicitly stating that it is electrically connected is the same as the case of explicitly stating that it is simply connected.

The display element, the display device having the display element, the light emitting element, and the light emitting device having the light emitting element can use various forms and can have various elements. For example, as a display element, a display device, a light emitting element or a light emitting device, an EL element (EL element containing organic and inorganic substances, an organic EL element, an inorganic EL element), an electron emitting element, a liquid crystal element, an electronic ink, an electrophoresis element, etc. Grating light valve (GLV), plasma display (PD)
A display medium such as P), a digital micromirror device (DMD), a piezoelectric ceramic display, a carbon nanotube, or the like, whose contrast, brightness, reflectance, transmittance, etc. change due to an electromagnetic action can be used. The display device using the EL element is an EL display, and the display device using an electron emitting element is a field emission display (FED) or an SED type flat display (SED: Surface-co).
Liquid crystal displays (transmissive liquid crystal display, semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, reflective liquid crystal display, direct-view liquid crystal display, projection liquid crystal display), electronic ink, etc. There is an electronic paper as a display device using an electrophoretic element.

The EL element is an element having an anode, a cathode, and an EL layer sandwiched between the anode and the cathode. The EL layer uses light emission (fluorescence) from singlet excitons, and 3
Those that utilize light emission (phosphorescence) from a multiplet exciter, those that utilize light emission (fluorescence) from a singlet exciter, and those that utilize light emission (phosphorescence) from a triplet exciter. , Those formed by organic substances, those formed by inorganic substances, those formed by organic substances and those formed by inorganic substances, high molecular weight materials, low molecular weight materials, high molecular weight materials and low molecular weight materials. Those containing and the like can be used. However, it is not limited to this, and E
Various L elements can be used.

The electron emitting element is an element that concentrates a high electric field on a sharp cathode to extract electrons. For example, as an electron emitting element, a spint type, a carbon nanotube (CNT) type, a MIM (Metal-Insulator-Metal) type in which a metal-insulator-metal is laminated, and a MIS (Metal-Insulator-Metal) in which a metal-insulator-semiconductor is laminated are used. -Semicon
ductor) type, MOS type, silicon type, thin film diode type, diamond type, surface conduction emitter SCD type, ode type, diamond type, surface conduction emitter SCD type, thin film type such as metal-insulator-semiconductor-metal type, HEED Molds, EL molds, porous silicon molds, surface conduction (SED) molds and the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various electron emitting elements can be used.

The liquid crystal element is an element that controls the transmission or non-transmission of light by the optical modulation action of the liquid crystal, and is composed of a pair of electrodes and a liquid crystal. The optical modulation action of the liquid crystal is controlled by an electric field (including a horizontal electric field, a vertical electric field, or an oblique electric field) applied to the liquid crystal. The liquid crystal elements include nematic liquid crystal, cholesteric liquid crystal, smectic liquid crystal, discotic liquid crystal, thermotropic liquid crystal, liotropic liquid crystal, liotropic liquid crystal, low molecular weight liquid crystal, polymer liquid crystal, strong dielectric liquid crystal, anti-strong dielectric liquid crystal, and main chain. Type liquid crystal, side chain type polymer liquid crystal, plasma address liquid crystal (PDLC), banana type liquid crystal, TN (Twisted)
Nematic mode, STN (Super Twisted Nematic) mode, IPS (In-Plane-Switching) mode, FFS (Fringe)
Field Switching) mode, MVA (Multi-domain Ver)
Tical Alignment mode, PVA (Patterned Vertic)
al focus), ASV (Advanced Super View) mode, ASM (Axially Symmetrically aligned Micro-ce)
ll) mode, OCB (Optical Compensated Birefring)
ence) mode, ECB (Electrically Controlled Bir)
Efringence mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liquid)
Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liqui)
d Crystal) mode, PDLC (Polymer Dispersed Liq)
A uid Crystal) mode, a guest host mode, or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various liquid crystal elements can be used.

The electronic paper includes those displayed by molecules such as optical anisotropy and dye molecular orientation, those displayed by particles such as electrophoresis, particle movement, particle rotation, and phase change, and one end of the film. Those displayed by moving, those displayed by color development / phase change of molecules, those displayed by light absorption of molecules, those displayed by self-luminous combination of electrons and holes, etc. .. For example, as electronic paper, microcapsule type electrophoresis, horizontally moving type electrophoresis, vertically moving type electrophoresis, spherical twist ball, magnetic twist ball, cylindrical twist ball method, charged toner, electronic powder fluid, magnetic electrophoresis type, magnetic heat sensitivity. Formula, electrowetting, light scattering (transparent cloudiness), cholesteric liquid crystal / photoconductive layer, cholesteric liquid crystal, bistable nematic liquid crystal, strong dielectric liquid crystal, bicolor dye / liquid crystal dispersion type, movable film, leuco dye extinction Color, photochromic, electrochromic, electrodeposition, flexible organic EL and the like can be used. However, it is not limited to this
Various kinds of electronic paper can be used. Here, by using the microcapsule type electrophoresis, it is possible to solve the aggregation and precipitation of the electrophoretic particles, which are the drawbacks of the electrophoresis method. The electronic powder fluid has advantages such as high-speed response, high reflectance, wide viewing angle, low power consumption, and memory property.

In the plasma display, a substrate having an electrode formed on the surface and a substrate having an electrode and a minute groove formed on the surface and a phosphor layer formed in the groove face each other at a narrow interval to enclose a rare gas. Has a structure. It should be noted that the display can be performed by generating ultraviolet rays by applying a voltage between the electrodes and illuminating the phosphor. As a plasma display, DC
Type PDP or AC type PDP may be used. Here, as a plasma display panel, AS
W (Addless Will Sutain) drive, ADS (Address Display Sep) that divides the subframe into a reset period, an address period, and a maintenance period.
rated) drive, CLEAR (Low Energy Addless and R)
extension of False Sequence) drive, AL
IS (Alternate Lighting of Surfaces) method, TER
ES (Techbology of Reciprocal Susfiner) drive or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various plasma displays can be used.

A display device that requires a light source, for example, a liquid crystal display (transmissive liquid crystal display, semi-transmissive liquid crystal display, reflective liquid crystal display, direct-view liquid crystal display, projection liquid crystal display), or a grating light valve (GLV) is used. As a light source of the existing display device, a display device using a digital micromirror device (DMD), or the like, an electroluminescence, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, an LED, a laser light source, a mercury lamp, or the like can be used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various light sources can be used.

As the transistor, various types of transistors can be used. Therefore,
There is no limitation on the type of transistor used. For example, a thin film transistor (TFT) having a non-single crystal semiconductor film typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystal (also referred to as microcrystal or semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used. When using a TFT, there are various merits. For example, since it can be manufactured at a lower temperature than that of single crystal silicon, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost or increase the size of the manufacturing apparatus. Since the manufacturing equipment can be made large, it can be manufactured on a large substrate. Therefore, a large number of display devices can be manufactured at the same time, so that the display devices can be manufactured at low cost. Further, since the production temperature is low, a substrate having weak heat resistance can be used. Therefore, the transistor can be manufactured on the transparent substrate. Then, the transmission of light in the display element can be controlled by using the transistor on the transparent substrate.
Alternatively, since the film thickness of the transistor is thin, a part of the film constituting the transistor can transmit light. Therefore, the aperture ratio can be improved.

By using a catalyst (nickel or the like) when producing polycrystalline silicon, it is possible to further improve the crystallinity and produce a transistor having good electrical characteristics. As a result, the gate driver circuit (scanning line drive circuit) and source driver circuit (signal line drive circuit)
, A signal processing circuit (signal generation circuit, gamma correction circuit, DA conversion circuit, etc.) can be integrally formed on the substrate.

By using a catalyst (nickel or the like) when producing microcrystalline silicon, it is possible to further improve the crystallinity and produce a transistor having good electrical characteristics. At this time, the crystallinity can be improved only by applying a heat treatment without irradiating the laser beam. As a result, a part of the gate driver circuit (scanning line drive circuit) and the source driver circuit (analog switch, etc.) can be integrally formed on the substrate. Further, when the laser beam is not irradiated for crystallization, unevenness in the crystallinity of silicon can be suppressed. Therefore, a beautiful image can be displayed.

However, it is possible to produce polycrystalline silicon or microcrystalline silicon without using a catalyst (nickel or the like).

It is desirable, but not limited to, improving the crystallinity of silicon to polycrystalline or microcrystals in the entire panel. The crystallinity of silicon may be improved only in a part of the panel. It is possible to selectively improve the crystallinity by selectively irradiating a laser beam or the like. For example, the laser beam may be irradiated only to the peripheral circuit region which is a region other than the pixel. Alternatively, the laser beam may be irradiated only to the area such as the gate driver circuit and the source driver circuit. Alternatively, the laser beam may be applied only to a part of the source driver circuit (for example, an analog switch). as a result,
Silicon crystallization can be improved only in areas where the circuit needs to operate at high speed. Since it is less necessary to operate the pixel region at high speed, the pixel circuit can be operated without any problem even if the crystallinity is not improved. Since the region for improving crystallinity is small, the manufacturing process can be shortened, the throughput can be improved, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, since the number of manufacturing devices required can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Alternatively, a transistor can be formed by using a semiconductor substrate, an SOI substrate, or the like. As a result, it is possible to manufacture a transistor having a small variation in characteristics, size, shape, etc., a high current supply capacity, and a small size. By using these transistors, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the circuit or to increase the integration of the circuit.

Alternatively, a transistor having a compound semiconductor or oxide semiconductor such as ZnO, a-InGaZnO, SiGe, GaAs, IZO, ITO, SnO, or a thin film transistor obtained by thinning these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used. You can. As a result, the manufacturing temperature can be lowered, and for example, a transistor can be manufactured at room temperature. As a result, the transistor can be formed directly on a substrate having low heat resistance, for example, a plastic substrate or a film substrate. In addition, these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors are used.
It can be used not only for the channel portion of a transistor but also for other purposes. For example, these compound semiconductors or oxide semiconductors can be used as resistance elements, pixel electrodes, and transparent electrodes. Further, since they can be formed or formed at the same time as the transistor, the cost can be reduced.

Alternatively, a transistor formed by using an inkjet or a printing method can be used. As a result, it can be manufactured at room temperature, at a low degree of vacuum, or on a large substrate. Further, since it can be manufactured without using a mask (reticle), the layout of the transistor can be easily changed. Further, since it is not necessary to use a resist, the material cost can be reduced and the number of steps can be reduced. Further, since the film is attached only to the necessary part, the material is not wasted and the cost can be reduced as compared with the manufacturing method in which the film is formed on the entire surface and then etched.

Alternatively, an organic semiconductor, a transistor having carbon nanotubes, or the like can be used. As a result, a transistor can be formed on a bendable substrate.
Therefore, it can be made strong against impact.

Further, transistors having various structures can be used. For example, a MOS type transistor, a junction type transistor, a bipolar transistor and the like can be used as the transistor. By using a MOS type transistor, the size of the transistor can be reduced. Therefore, a large number of transistors can be mounted. By using a bipolar transistor, a large current can flow. Therefore, the circuit can be operated at high speed.

Note that MOS-type transistors, bipolar transistors, and the like may be mixed and formed on one substrate. As a result, low power consumption, miniaturization, high-speed operation, and the like can be realized.

In addition, various transistors can be used.

The transistor can be formed by using various substrates. The type of substrate is not limited to a specific one. Examples of the substrate on which the transistor is formed include a single crystal substrate, an SOI substrate, a glass substrate, a quartz substrate, a plastic substrate, a paper substrate, a cellophane substrate, a stone substrate, a wood substrate, and a cloth substrate (natural fibers (silk, cotton, linen). ), Synthetic fibers (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foil, etc. Can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as a substrate. Alternatively, a transistor may be formed using one substrate, then the transistor may be transposed to another substrate, and the transistor may be arranged on another substrate. The substrates on which the transistors are transferred include single crystal substrates, SOI substrates, glass substrates, quartz substrates, plastic substrates, paper substrates, cellophane substrates, stone substrates, wood substrates, cloth substrates (natural fibers (silk, cotton, linen), etc. Use synthetic fibers (including nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fibers (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester), leather substrates, rubber substrates, stainless steel substrates, substrates with stainless steel foil, etc. Can be done. Alternatively, the skin of animals such as humans (skin surface, dermis)
Alternatively, the subcutaneous tissue may be used as a substrate. Alternatively, a transistor may be formed using a certain substrate, and the substrate may be polished to be thin. As the substrate to be polished, a single crystal substrate, SOI
Substrates, glass substrates, quartz substrates, plastic substrates, paper substrates, cellophane substrates, stone substrates,
Wood substrate, cloth substrate (including natural fiber (silk, cotton, linen), synthetic fiber (nylon, polyurethane, polyester) or recycled fiber (including acetate, cupra, rayon, recycled polyester)), leather substrate, rubber substrate, stainless steel -A still substrate, a substrate having stainless steel still foil, etc. can be used. Alternatively, the skin (skin surface, dermis) or subcutaneous tissue of an animal such as a human may be used as a substrate. By using these substrates, it is possible to form transistors with good characteristics, to form transistors with low power consumption, and to manufacture devices that are hard to break.
It is possible to impart heat resistance, reduce the weight, or reduce the thickness.

The transistor configuration can take various forms. It is not limited to a specific configuration. For example, a multi-gate structure having two or more gate electrodes may be used. In the multi-gate structure, since the channel regions are connected in series, a plurality of transistors are connected in series. The multi-gate structure can reduce off-current and improve reliability by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Alternatively, due to the multi-gate structure, even if the drain-source voltage changes when operating in the saturation region, the drain-source current does not change much, and the slope of the voltage / current characteristics can be made flat. it can. By utilizing the characteristic that the slope of the voltage / current characteristic is flat, it is possible to realize an ideal current source circuit and an active load having a very high resistance value. As a result, a differential circuit or a current mirror circuit having good characteristics can be realized. Further, the structure may be such that gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel. By adopting a structure in which the gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel, the channel region is increased, so that the current value can be increased or the S value can be reduced by easily forming a depletion layer. When the gate electrodes are arranged above and below the channel, the configuration is such that a plurality of transistors are connected in parallel.

Alternatively, the structure may be such that the gate electrode is arranged above the channel region, or the gate electrode may be arranged below the channel region. Alternatively, it may have a normal stagger structure or a reverse stagger structure, the channel region may be divided into a plurality of regions, the channel regions may be connected in parallel, or the channel regions may be connected in series. Good. Also,
The source electrode and the drain electrode may overlap the channel region (or a part thereof).
By forming the structure in which the source electrode and the drain electrode overlap the channel region (or a part thereof), it is possible to prevent the operation from becoming unstable due to the accumulation of electric charges in a part of the channel region. Moreover, the LDD area may be provided. By providing the LDD region, it is possible to reduce the off-current or improve the reliability by improving the withstand voltage of the transistor. Alternatively, L
By providing the DD region, even if the drain-source voltage changes when operating in the saturation region, the drain-source current does not change much, and the slope of the voltage / current characteristics can be made flat. it can.

Various types of transistors can be used, and various substrates can be used for forming the transistors. Therefore, all the circuits necessary for realizing a predetermined function may be formed on the same substrate. For example, all of the circuits required to achieve a given function may be formed using a glass substrate, a plastic substrate, a single crystal substrate, or an SOI substrate, and may be formed using various substrates. May be good. Since all the circuits required to realize a predetermined function are formed using the same board, the cost can be reduced by reducing the number of parts, or the reliability can be improved by reducing the number of connection points with circuit parts. Can be planned. Alternatively, a part of the circuit necessary for realizing the predetermined function is formed on one substrate, and another part of the circuit necessary for realizing the predetermined function is formed on another substrate. You may be. That is, not all of the circuits required to realize a predetermined function need to be formed by using the same substrate. For example, a part of a circuit necessary to realize a predetermined function is formed on a glass substrate by using a transistor, and another part of a circuit necessary to realize a predetermined function is a single crystal substrate. An IC chip formed above and composed of transistors on a single crystal substrate may be connected to a glass substrate by COG (Chip On Glass), and the IC chip may be arranged on the glass substrate. Alternatively, the IC chip is TAB (T).
Ape Automated Bonding) or a printed circuit board may be used to connect to the glass substrate. Since a part of the circuit is formed on the same substrate in this way, it is possible to reduce the cost by reducing the number of parts or improve the reliability by reducing the number of connection points with the circuit parts. Further, since the circuit of the part where the drive voltage is high or the part where the drive frequency is high consumes a large amount of power, the circuit of such a part is not formed on the same substrate. Instead, for example, on a single crystal substrate. If a circuit of that portion is formed and an IC chip composed of the circuit is used, an increase in power consumption can be prevented.

It should be noted that one pixel means one element whose brightness can be controlled. Therefore, as an example, one pixel indicates one color element, and the brightness is expressed by one of the color elements.
Therefore, at that time, in the case of a color display device composed of R (red) G (green) B (blue) color elements, the minimum unit of the image is the R pixel, the G pixel, and the B pixel. It shall consist of three pixels. The color element is not limited to three colors, and three or more colors may be used, or a color other than RGB may be used. For example, white may be added to make RGBW (W is white). Also, R
For example, one or more colors such as yellow, cyan, magenta, emerald green, and vermilion may be added to the GB. Also, for example, a color similar to at least one color in RGB can be displayed in RGB.
May be added to. For example, it may be R, G, B1 or B2. Both B1 and B2 are blue, but their frequencies are slightly different. Similarly, it may be R1, R2, G, B. By using such a color element, it is possible to perform a display closer to the real thing. Alternatively, power consumption can be reduced by using such a color element. Also,
As another example, when controlling the brightness of one color element using a plurality of areas,
One area may be one pixel. Therefore, as an example, when area gradation is performed or when sub-pixels (sub-pixels) are provided, there are a plurality of areas for controlling brightness for one color element, and the gradation is expressed as a whole. However, one pixel may be used as one area for controlling the brightness. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of a plurality of pixels. Alternatively, even if there are a plurality of regions for controlling brightness in one color element, they may be put together to form one color element as one pixel. Therefore, in that case, one color element is composed of one pixel. Further, when the brightness of one color element is controlled by using a plurality of areas, the size of the area contributing to the display may differ depending on the pixel. Further, in a plurality of areas for controlling brightness, which are present for one color element, the signals supplied to each may be slightly different to widen the viewing angle. That is, 1
For each color element, the potentials of the pixel electrodes of each of the plurality of regions may be different. As a result, the voltage applied to the liquid crystal molecules differs depending on each pixel electrode. Therefore, the viewing angle can be widened.

When explicitly describing one pixel (three colors), it is assumed that the three pixels of R, G, and B are considered as one pixel. When explicitly describing one pixel (one color), when there are a plurality of regions for one color element, it is assumed that they are collectively regarded as one pixel.

In this document (specification, claims, drawings, etc.), the pixels may be arranged (arranged) in a matrix. Here, the fact that the pixels are arranged (arranged) in the matrix includes a case where the pixels are arranged side by side on a straight line in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, and a case where the pixels are arranged on a jagged line. Therefore, for example, three color elements (for example, R)
In the case of full-color display in GB), it includes the case where the stripes are arranged and the case where the dots of the three color elements are arranged in a delta. Furthermore, the case where the Bayer is arranged is also included. The color element is not limited to three colors, and may be more than three colors. For example, RGBW (W is white), RGB with one or more colors such as yellow, cyan, and magenta added.
Further, the size of the display area may be different for each dot of the color element. As a result, it is possible to reduce the power consumption or extend the life of the display element.

An active matrix method having an active element in the pixel or a passive matrix method having no active element in the pixel can be used.

In the active matrix method, not only transistors but also various active elements (active elements, non-linear elements) can be used as active elements (active elements, non-linear elements). For example, MIM (Metal Insulator Metal) and TFD (
It is also possible to use Thin Film Diode) or the like. Since these devices have few manufacturing processes, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost or improve the yield. Further, since the size of the element is small, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high brightness can be achieved.

In addition to the active matrix method, it is also possible to use a passive matrix type that does not use an active element (active element, non-linear element). Since no active element (active element, non-linear element) is used, the number of manufacturing steps is small, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced or the yield can be improved. Further, since an active element (active element, non-linear element) is not used, the aperture ratio can be improved, and low power consumption and high brightness can be achieved.

A transistor is an element having at least three terminals including a gate, a drain, and a source, and has a channel region between a drain region and a source region, and a drain region, a channel region, and a source region. A current can flow through and. Here, since the source and the drain change depending on the structure of the transistor, the operating conditions, and the like, it is difficult to limit which is the source or the drain. Therefore, in this document (specification, claims, drawings, etc.), the area that functions as a source and a drain may not be referred to as a source or a drain. In that case, as an example, they may be referred to as a first terminal and a second terminal, respectively. Alternatively, they may be referred to as a first electrode and a second electrode, respectively. Alternatively, it may be referred to as a source area or a drain area.

The transistor may be an element having at least three terminals including a base, an emitter, and a collector. In this case as well, the emitter and collector are connected to the first terminal and the second terminal.
It may be referred to as a terminal.

The gate refers to the whole including the gate electrode and the gate wiring (also referred to as a gate line, a gate signal line, a scanning line, a scanning signal line, etc.) or a part thereof. The gate electrode refers to a conductive film of a portion that overlaps with a semiconductor forming a channel region via a gate insulating film. A part of the gate electrode is LDD (Lightly Dop).
It may overlap with the ed Drain) region or the source region (or drain region) via the gate insulating film. The gate wiring is a wiring for connecting between the gate electrodes of each transistor, a wiring for connecting between the gate electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the gate electrode and another wiring. Say.

However, there are parts (regions, conductive films, wiring, etc.) that also function as gate electrodes and also as gate wiring. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may be referred to as a gate electrode or a gate wiring. That is, there is a region where the gate electrode and the gate wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, when a part of the gate wiring that is stretched and the channel region overlaps, that portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as a gate wiring, but also as a gate electrode. It will be working. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may be referred to as a gate electrode or a gate wiring.

A portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) formed of the same material as the gate electrode and formed and connected to the same island as the gate electrode may also be referred to as a gate electrode. Similarly, a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) formed of the same material as the gate wiring and formed and connected to the same island as the gate wiring may also be referred to as a gate wiring. In a strict sense, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may not overlap with the channel region or may not have a function of connecting to another gate electrode. However, due to the specifications at the time of manufacture, the part (area, conductive film, wiring, etc.) that is formed of the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and forms the same island as the gate electrode or gate wiring. There is. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may also be referred to as a gate electrode or gate wiring.

For example, in a multi-gate transistor, one gate electrode and another gate electrode are often connected by a conductive film formed of the same material as the gate electrode. Since such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) is a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) for connecting the gate electrode and the gate electrode, it may be called a gate wiring, but it may be called a multi-gate. Can be regarded as one transistor, so it may be called a gate electrode. That is, the part (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) formed of the same material as the gate electrode or gate wiring and forming the same island as the gate electrode or gate wiring is connected to the gate electrode or gate wiring. You may call it. Further, for example, a conductive film of a portion connecting the gate electrode and the gate wiring and formed of a material different from the gate electrode or the gate wiring may also be referred to as a gate electrode or the gate wiring. You may call it.

The gate terminal refers to a part of the gate electrode (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) or a part electrically connected to the gate electrode (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.). ..

When referred to as a gate wiring, a gate line, a gate signal line, a scanning line, a scanning signal line, etc., the gate of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. In this case, the gate wiring, the gate line, the gate signal line, the scanning line, and the scanning signal line are simultaneously formed with the wiring formed in the same layer as the gate of the transistor, the wiring formed of the same material as the gate of the transistor, or the gate of the transistor. It may mean a film-formed wiring. Examples include wiring for holding capacity, power supply line, reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

The source refers to the whole including the source region, the source electrode, and the source wiring (also referred to as a source line, a source signal line, a data line, a data signal line, etc.), or a part thereof. The source region refers to a semiconductor region containing a large amount of P-type impurities (boron, gallium, etc.) and N-type impurities (phosphorus, arsenic, etc.). Therefore, the region containing a small amount of P-type impurities and N-type impurities, that is, the so-called LDD (Lightly Doped Drain) region is not included in the source region. The source electrode refers to a conductive layer in a portion formed of a material different from the source region and electrically connected to the source region. However, the source electrode may also be referred to as a source electrode including the source region. The source wiring is a wiring for connecting between the source electrodes of each transistor, a wiring for connecting between the source electrodes of each pixel, or a wiring for connecting the source electrode and another wiring. Say.

However, there are parts (regions, conductive films, wirings, etc.) that also function as source electrodes and also as source wiring. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may be referred to as a source electrode or a source wiring. That is, there is a region where the source electrode and the source wiring cannot be clearly distinguished. For example, when a part of the stretched source wiring and the source region overlap, that portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) functions as the source wiring, but as a source electrode. Will also be working. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may be referred to as a source electrode or a source wiring.

In addition, a part (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) formed of the same material as the source electrode and formed and connected to the same island as the source electrode, and a portion (region) connecting the source electrode and the source electrode. , Conductor, wiring, etc.) may also be referred to as a source electrode. Further, the portion that overlaps with the source region may also be referred to as a source electrode. Similarly, a region formed of the same material as the source wiring and formed and connected to the same island as the source wiring may also be referred to as a source wiring. Such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may not have a function of connecting to another source electrode in a strict sense. However, there are parts (regions, conductive films, wirings, etc.) that are formed of the same material as the source electrode or source wiring due to specifications at the time of manufacture and are connected to the source electrode or source wiring. Therefore, such a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) may also be referred to as a source electrode or source wiring.

Note that, for example, a conductive film of a portion connecting the source electrode and the source wiring and formed of a material different from the source electrode or the source wiring may also be referred to as a source electrode or the source wiring. You may call it.

The source terminal refers to a part of a region of the source region, a source electrode, and a portion (region, conductive film, wiring, etc.) electrically connected to the source electrode.

When calling source wiring, source line, source signal line, data line, data signal line, etc.
The source (drain) of the transistor may not be connected to the wiring. In this case, the source wiring, source line, source signal line, data line, and data signal line are wiring formed in the same layer as the source (drain) of the transistor, and wiring formed of the same material as the source (drain) of the transistor. Alternatively, it may mean wiring formed at the same time as the source (drain) of the transistor. Examples include wiring for holding capacity, power supply line, reference potential supply wiring, and the like.

The drain is the same as the source.

The semiconductor device refers to a device having a circuit including a semiconductor element (transistor, diode, thyristor, etc.). Further, a device that can function by utilizing semiconductor characteristics may be referred to as a semiconductor device. Alternatively, a device having a semiconductor material is called a semiconductor device.

The display element includes an optical modulation element, a liquid crystal element, a light emitting element, an EL element (organic EL element, an inorganic EL element or an EL element containing an organic substance and an inorganic substance), an electron emitting element, an electrophoresis element, a discharge element, and a light reflection. It refers to an element, an optical diffractometer, a digital micromirror device (DMD), and the like. However, it is not limited to this.

The display device refers to a device having a display element. The display device may include a plurality of pixels including a display element. The display device may include a peripheral drive circuit for driving a plurality of pixels. The peripheral drive circuit for driving the plurality of pixels may be formed on the same substrate as the plurality of pixels. The display device includes peripheral drive circuits arranged on the substrate by wire bonding, bumps, etc., so-called chip-on-glass (COG) connected IC chips, or TAB-connected IC chips. You can stay. The display device may include a flexible printed circuit (FPC) to which an IC chip, a resistance element, a capacitance element, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached. The display device may include a printed wiring board (PWB) connected via a flexible printed circuit (FPC) or the like and to which an IC chip, a resistance element, a capacitance element, an inductor, a transistor, or the like is attached. The display device may include an optical sheet such as a polarizing plate or a retardation plate. The display device may include a lighting device, a housing, an audio input / output device, an optical sensor, and the like. Here, even if the lighting device such as the backlight unit includes a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflection sheet, a light source (LED, a cold cathode tube, etc.), a cooling device (water-cooled type, air-cooled type, etc.), etc. good.

The lighting device refers to a device having a backlight unit, a light guide plate, a prism sheet, a diffusion sheet, a reflective sheet, a light source (LED, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, etc.), a cooling device, and the like.

The light emitting device means a device having a light emitting element or the like. When a light emitting element is provided as a display element, the light emitting device is one of specific examples of the display device.

The reflecting device means a device having a light reflecting element, a light diffraction element, a light reflecting electrode, and the like.

The liquid crystal display device means a display device having a liquid crystal element. Liquid crystal display devices include a direct-view type, a projection type, a transmissive type, a reflective type, and a semi-transmissive type.

The drive device refers to a device having a semiconductor element, an electric circuit, and an electronic circuit. For example, a transistor that controls the input of a signal from a source signal line into a pixel (sometimes called a selection transistor, a switching transistor, etc.), a transistor that supplies a voltage or current to a pixel electrode, or a voltage or current to a light emitting element. Is an example of a driving device, such as a transistor for supplying a voltage. Further, a circuit that supplies a signal to the gate signal line (sometimes called a gate driver, a gate line drive circuit, etc.) and a circuit that supplies a signal to the source signal line (sometimes called a source driver, a source line drive circuit, etc.) ) Is an example of a drive device.

The display device, the semiconductor device, the lighting device, the cooling device, the light emitting device, the reflecting device, the driving device, and the like may overlap each other. For example, the display device may include a semiconductor device and a light emitting device. Alternatively, the semiconductor device may have a display device and a drive device.

When it is explicitly stated that B is formed on A or B is formed on A, it is limited to B being formed in direct contact with A. Not done. It also includes the case where it is not in direct contact, that is, the case where another object intervenes between A and B. Here, A and B are objects (for example, devices, elements, circuits, wirings, electrodes, terminals, conductive films, layers, etc.
Etc.).

Therefore, for example, when it is explicitly stated that the layer B is formed on the layer A (or on the layer A), the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A. It includes a case where another layer (for example, layer C or layer D) is formed in direct contact with the layer A and a layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A. The other layer (for example, layer C, layer D, etc.) may be a single layer or a plurality of layers.

Further, the same applies to the case where it is explicitly stated that B is formed above A, and the case is not limited to the case where B is in direct contact with A, and between A and B. It shall also include the case where another object intervenes in. Therefore, for example, when the layer B is formed above the layer A, there are cases where the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer A and another layer in direct contact with the layer A. It is assumed that the case where (for example, layer C, layer D, etc.) is formed and the layer B is formed in direct contact with the layer C is included. The other layer (for example, layer C, layer D, etc.) may be a single layer or a plurality of layers.

In addition, when it is explicitly stated that B is formed in direct contact with A, it includes the case where B is formed in direct contact with A, and is different between A and B. If an object intervenes, it shall not be included.

The same applies to the case where B is below A or B is below A.

Those explicitly described as singular are preferably singular.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a plurality. Similarly, for those explicitly described as plural, it is desirable that there are plural. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it can be singular.

According to the present invention, a wide viewing angle display can be realized. In addition, a display device having excellent contrast can be obtained. Further, it is possible to provide a display device having excellent display quality.
Further, it is possible to provide a display device that is not easily affected by noise and can perform a beautiful display. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a display device in which display deterioration is unlikely to occur. Alternatively, it is possible to provide a display device having an excellent product life.

The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure explaining an example of the display device which has the pixel of this invention. The figure explaining one composition example of the pixel which the display device of this invention has. The figure explaining one operation method of the pixel shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure explaining an example of the display device which has the pixel of this invention. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a signal line switching circuit included in the display device shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows an example of the pixel structure of this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the layout of the pixel of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure explaining the liquid crystal mode of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure explaining the liquid crystal mode of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure explaining the liquid crystal mode of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure explaining the liquid crystal mode of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the peripheral component of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the peripheral component of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the peripheral component of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the peripheral component of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the panel circuit structure of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure explaining an example of the structure of the transistor which the display device which concerns on this invention has. The figure explaining an example of the structure of the transistor which the display device which concerns on this invention has. The figure explaining an example of the structure of the transistor which the display device which concerns on this invention has. The figure explaining an example of the structure of the transistor which the display device which concerns on this invention has. The figure explaining an example of the structure of the transistor which the display device which concerns on this invention has. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows one configuration example of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows the electronic device which used the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure which shows an example of the driving method of the display device which concerns on this invention. The figure explaining the prior art.

Hereinafter, one aspect of the present invention will be described. However, those skilled in the art can easily understand that the present invention can be carried out in many different modes, and that the forms and details thereof can be variously changed without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention. Will be done. Therefore, the interpretation is not limited to the description content of this embodiment. In the configuration of the present invention described below, reference numerals indicating the same thing will be commonly used between different drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Embodiment 1)
The basic configuration of the pixels of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. The pixels shown in FIG. 1 are a first switch 111, a second switch 112, a third switch 113, a first resistor 114, a second resistor 115, a first liquid crystal element 121, and a second liquid crystal element 122. , First holding capacity 131
And has a second holding capacity 132. Further, the pixels are connected to the signal line 116 and the Cs line 119. Each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 has a pixel electrode, a common electrode 118, and a liquid crystal controlled by the pixel electrode and the common electrode 118.

In FIG. 1, the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element 121 is connected to the signal line 116 via the first switch 111. Further, the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element 121 is the second switch 1.
It is also connected to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 via the 12 and the first resistor 114. Assuming that the connection point between the first resistor 114 and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 is the node 142, the node 142 is connected to the Cs line 119 via the third switch 113 and the second resistor 115.
Is connected to. Further, the connection point between the second switch 112 and the wiring to which the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the first switch 111 are connected is referred to as a node 141.

The on / off of the first switch 111, the second switch 112, and the third switch 113 is controlled by a signal input to the scanning line 117, for example, as shown in FIG.

Further, an image signal corresponding to a video signal, that is, a potential corresponding to the gradation of pixels is input to the signal line 116.

Although the liquid crystal element exhibits a voltage holding characteristic, its holding rate is not 100%. Therefore, in order to maintain the held voltage, the pixels shown in FIGS. 1 and 2 are the first liquid crystal elements 121 and the second. A first holding capacity 131 and a second holding capacity 132 are provided corresponding to each of the liquid crystal elements 122. Specifically, the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element 121 is connected to the Cs line 119 via the first holding capacity 131, and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 has the second holding capacity 13.
It is connected to the Cs line 119 via 2. Since the voltage holding characteristic of the liquid crystal element depends on the liquid crystal material, impurities mixed therein, the size of pixels, etc., when the voltage holding rate of the liquid crystal element is high, a holding capacity is particularly provided as shown in FIG. It does not have to be. Further, for example, when the second liquid crystal element 122 contributes less to the display than the first liquid crystal element 121, the second holding capacity provided for the second liquid crystal element 122 which contributes less to the display 132 may be omitted.

Further, in FIG. 1, the node 141 is connected to the node 142 via the second switch 112 and the first resistor 114 in this order, but is connected to the first resistor 114 and the second switch 112 in this order. Is also good. Further, the node 142 has a second resistor 115 and a third switch 11
3 may be connected to the Cs line 119 in order. Of course, as shown in FIG. 27, the connection relationship between the switch and the resistor may be reversed in the second switch 112 and the first resistor 114, and in the third switch 113 and the second resistor 115.

Further, each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 may be composed of a plurality of liquid crystal elements. Similarly, each of the first holding capacity 131 and the second holding capacity 132 may also be composed of a plurality of holding capacities. For example, FIG. 3 shows the first liquid crystal element 1
21, each of the second liquid crystal element 122 has a first holding capacity 131 and a second from the two liquid crystal elements.
The case where each of the holding capacity 132 of the above is composed of two holding capacities is shown.

Next, the operation of the above-mentioned pixels will be described with reference to FIG. 1st switch 111, 2nd
The on / off of the switch 112 and the third switch 113 is controlled by inputting a signal to the scanning line 117, and here, the high level (hereinafter referred to as H level) is applied to the scanning line 117.
The case where the first switch 111, the second switch 112, and the third switch 113 are turned on by inputting the above will be described. In this case, when the Low level (hereinafter referred to as L level) is input to the scanning line 117, these switches are turned off.

First, when the scanning line 117 reaches the H level, the first switch 111 and the second switch 112
And the third switch 113 is turned on, and the potential corresponding to the gradation of the pixel input from the signal line 116 is passed through the first switch 111 to the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the first holding capacity 131. It is supplied to the first electrode of. Further, this potential is supplied to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 and the first electrode of the second holding capacity 132 via the second switch 112 and the first resistor 114. The potential supplied to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 and the first electrode of the second holding capacity 132 is the same as the potential at the node 142, and the potential is the potential difference between the node 141 and the Cs line 119. It is also determined by the resistance values in the first resistor 114 and the second resistor 115. That is, the signal line 11 is attached to the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122.
A potential whose potential corresponding to the gradation of the pixel input from 6 is divided by the first resistor 114 and the second resistor 115 is supplied. The potential supplied to Vsig according to the gradation of the pixel input from the signal line 116, the resistance value of the first resistor 114 to R1, the resistance value of the second resistor 115 to R2, and the potential supplied to the Cs line 119. Is Vcs, and the potential of node 141 is Vsig.
, The potential of the node 142 is Vcs + (Vsig-Vcs) × R2 / (R1 + R2).

Further, the first holding capacity 131 has a potential and Cs corresponding to the gradation input from the signal line 116.
The potential difference from the potential of the wire 119 is the potential divided by resistance in the second holding capacitance 132 and the Cs wire 1.
The potential difference from the potential of 19 is maintained.

Next, the L level is input to the scanning line 117. Then, the first switch 111, the second switch 112, and the third switch 113 are turned off, and the signal line 116 and the first liquid crystal element 121 are turned off.
And the second liquid crystal element 122 are electrically cut off from each other. However, the first holding capacity 131 holds the potential difference between the potential corresponding to the gradation input from the signal line 116 and the potential of the Cs line 119, and the second holding capacity 132 holds the potential divided by resistance. The potential difference from the potential of the Cs line 119 is maintained. Therefore, the pixel electrode of the first liquid crystal element 121 can maintain the potential corresponding to the gradation of the pixel input from the signal line 116, and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 also has the resistance-divided potential. Can be maintained.

In this way, the gradation of the pixel is expressed using the potential difference held in the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122, that is, the voltage. First liquid crystal element 121 and second liquid crystal element 12
Since a voltage different from that of No. 2 is applied, the liquid crystals of each liquid crystal element can exhibit different orientations. Therefore, the viewing angle characteristic can be improved. Since the gradation expressed by the pixel is determined by the orientation of the liquid crystal possessed by each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 in the pixel, the potential supplied from the signal line 116 takes these into consideration. It is necessary to decide. In this way, since the orientation of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 can be controlled from one signal line 116, the aperture ratio of the pixels can be increased.

By the way, in the case of such a pixel configuration, the second liquid crystal element 122 is the first liquid crystal element 1.
The applied voltage is smaller than that of 21. Therefore, the second resistor 115 is replaced with the first resistor 1.
If it is made too small, the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 122 becomes smaller than the threshold voltage of the liquid crystal, and the liquid crystal included in the second liquid crystal element 122 may not be driven. Therefore,
The resistance value R2 of the second resistor 115 is larger than the resistance value R1 of the first resistor 114 (R2> R).
1) is preferable. Of course, the relationship between the resistance values is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the liquid crystals of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 are driven and the gradation can be expressed using both liquid crystals. The threshold voltage of the liquid crystal refers to the critical value of the voltage required to drive the liquid crystal.

Further, the resistance values of the first resistor 114 and the second resistor 115 are large, and the second switch 112
And if the potential at the time of input from the signal line 116 can be maintained even after the first switch 111 is turned off at each of the node 141 and the node 142 without the third switch 113, these switches are particularly provided. It does not have to be. For example, if the resistance value of the first resistor 114 is large, the second switch 112 provided between the node 141 and the node 142 may be omitted, or if the resistance value of the second resistor 115 is large, the node 142 may be omitted. The third switch 113 provided between the and the Cs line 119 may be omitted. Of course, when both are large, it is possible to omit the second switch 112 and the third switch 113.

Various forms can be used for the first switch 111, the second switch 112, and the third switch 113, and an electric switch, a mechanical switch, or the like can be applied. .. That is, it is not limited to a specific one as long as it can control the flow of electric current. For example, a transistor or a diode may be used, or a logic circuit combining these may be used.

Further, the first resistor 114 and the second resistor 115 can be realized by using various elements. That is, it is not limited to the resistance element because it can be realized by using an element whose voltage drops when a current flows. For example, transistors, diodes, capacitive elements, inductors and the like can be used. As diodes, PN diodes, PIN diodes,
A MIM diode, a Schottky diode, a diode-connected transistor, or the like can be used. As the resistance element, a silicon layer, a silicon layer slightly doped with impurities (concentration similar to LDD), a silicon layer doped with a large amount of impurities (concentration similar to the source region and drain region), ITO and IZO. Oxide semiconductors such as, conductors with a long wiring length, and the like can be used. Although FIGS. 1 to 3 describe the case where the switch and the resistor are provided separately, the present invention is not limited to this. A switch and a resistor may be realized by using one element.

As shown in FIG. 2, a second transistor 212 and a third transistor 213 are used for the second switch 112 and the third switch 113 in FIG. 2, respectively, and the on-resistance of these transistors is used to be used in FIG. The first resistor 114 and the second resistor 115 in the above may be realized, and these resistors may be omitted. As described above, the second resistor 11
Since the resistance value R2 of 5 is preferably larger than the resistance value R1 of the first resistor 114 (R2> R1), the third transistor 213 is turned on as compared with the on resistance of the second transistor 212 in the configuration shown in FIG. The one with a large resistance is preferable. Therefore, the second transistor 212
Channel width is W2, channel length is L2, and channel width of the third transistor 213 is W3.
When the channel length is L3, it is preferable to use transistors such that W2 / L2> W3 / L3. However, it is not limited to this relationship. Of course, the pixel configuration is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 5, for example, the second transistor 2 is attached to each of the second switch 112 and the third switch 113 in FIG.
It is not necessary to omit the resistance by using the 12th and 3rd transistors 213.

Further, a transistor is attached to the first switch 111 (here, referred to as a first transistor).
When is used, the on-resistance of the first transistor is preferably lower, and when the channel width of the first transistor is W1 and the channel length is L1, it is preferable that W1 / L1 is larger. In FIG. 6, in the configuration shown in FIG. 4, the first transistor 2 is connected to the first switch 111.
The case where 11 is used is shown. When the first transistor 211 is compared with the second transistor 212 and the third transistor 213, W1 / L1> W2 / L2> W
It is preferable to use a transistor having a value of 3 / L3. However, it is not limited to this.

Further, in order to increase the on-resistance of the third transistor 213, a multi-gate transistor in which two transistors are connected in series to the transistor 313 may be used as shown in FIG. 7. Although FIG. 7 shows a case where two transistors are connected in series, the number of transistors connected in series is not particularly limited.

The channel length L of the transistor 313 acts as the total of the channel lengths of the two transistors connected in series when the channel widths W of the two transistors are equal. Therefore, W / L tends to be smaller, and the on-resistance can be increased. Therefore, the on-resistance of the transistor 313 can be easily increased as compared with the on-resistance of the second transistor 212 by using the multi-gate type transistor.

Further, for example, when the on-resistance of the third transistor 213 is much smaller than that of the second transistor 212, the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 122 is the second liquid crystal element 122.
When the voltage is equal to or lower than the threshold voltage of the liquid crystal possessed by the above, a diode-connected transistor 414 may be provided in series with the third transistor 213 as a resistor as shown in FIG. The diode-connected transistor 414 allows the second holding capacitance 132 to hold at least a voltage equal to or greater than the threshold voltage of the transistor 414.
Therefore, by using the diode-connected transistor 414, the second liquid crystal element 1
It becomes possible to increase the voltage applied to 22, and the second liquid crystal element 122 can be more reliably performed.
Can drive the liquid crystal possessed by. The diode has non-linearity, and the resistance value becomes larger in the region where the voltage is small, so that it is particularly effective in such a case. Of course, it is also possible to use a resistor. Here, the potential corresponding to the gradation input from the signal line 116 is shown as being positive, an N-channel type transistor is used for the transistor 414, and the drain electrode thereof is the third transistor 213. An example of being connected is shown. Of course, it is also possible to use a P-channel type transistor for the transistor 414. However, in this case, the source electrode is connected to the third transistor 213.

In a normal liquid crystal display device, positive and negative image signals centered on the potential of a common electrode, that is, positive and negative image signals are alternately supplied via signal lines every frame period. In such a case, the image signal is a signal that is positive and negative with respect to the potential supplied to the Cs line. Therefore, the potential of the Cs line 119 may be changed between when the positive image signal is input and when the negative image signal is input. That is, the potential of the Cs line 119 may be lower when the negative signal is input than when the positive signal is input. As a result, a voltage can be appropriately supplied to each pixel electrode. The pixels shown in FIG. 8 may be configured as shown in FIG. 9 so that they can correspond to both positive and negative image signals. The pixel shown in FIG. 9 has a configuration in which a diode-connected transistor 614 is further provided in parallel with the diode-connected transistor 414 in FIG. When these transistors are the same conductive type transistors, the transistors 414 and the transistors 614 are connected so that the drain electrodes are different from each other. With such a configuration, Cs line 1
Even if the relationship between the potential of 19 and the potential supplied from the signal line 116 is reversed, the second holding capacity 13
2 can hold at least a voltage equal to or higher than the threshold voltage of the transistor 414 or the transistor 614. Therefore, the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 122 can be increased, and the liquid crystal of the second liquid crystal element 122 can be driven more reliably. Even when such a driving method is not performed, the pixel configuration shown in FIG. 9 may be used.

In the present specification, when the potential of the pixel electrode is higher than that of the common electrode, a positive voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and when the potential of the common electrode is higher than that of the pixel electrode, a negative voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element. Notated as being done. Further, the image signal input from the signal line when the positive voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element is used as the positive signal, and the image signal input from the signal line when the negative voltage is applied is used as the negative electrode. Notated as a sex signal.

Further, in the present specification, different potentials may be supplied to the common electrode 118 and the Cs line 119, but the same potential may be supplied. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the common electrode 1
18 and Cs line 119 may be shared. Note that FIG. 10 shows a case where the common electrode 118 and the Cs line 119 in FIG. 1 are shared by using the wiring 100.

Subsequently, the display device having the pixels of the present invention described above will be described with reference to FIG.

The display device includes a signal line drive circuit 511, a scanning line drive circuit 512, and a pixel unit 513.
The pixel unit 513 includes a plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm extending in the column direction from the signal line drive circuit 511, scanning lines G1 to Gn arranged extending in the row direction from the scanning line drive circuit 512, and the like. It has a plurality of pixels 514 arranged in a matrix corresponding to the Cs lines Cs_1 to Cs_n and the signal lines S1 to Sm. Then, each pixel 514 has a signal line Sj (signal lines S1 to S).
It is connected to any one of m), scanning line Gi (any one of scanning lines G1 to Gn), and Cs line Cs_i.

The signal line Sj, the scanning line Gi, and the Cs line Cs_i correspond to the signal line 116, the scanning line 117, and the Cs line 119 in FIG. 2, respectively. The common electrode 118 in FIG. 2 has a plurality of pixels 51.
The four are commonly or electrically connected, and the same potential is supplied. When the Cs wire 119 and the common electrode 118 have the same potential, they may be electrically connected to each other by using conductive fine particles, wiring, or the like outside the pixel portion 513.

A row of pixels to be operated by a signal input from the scan line drive circuit 512 to the scan line Gi is selected, and each pixel belonging to the selected row is connected to each pixel from the signal line drive circuit 511 via the signal lines S1 to Sm. The potential corresponding to the gradation of is supplied. By the potential supplied from the signal line Sj, the pixel can express the gradation as described above.

In order to suppress display unevenness such as deterioration and flicker of the liquid crystal material, the polarity of the voltage applied to the pixel electrode is reversed with respect to the potential (common potential) of the common electrode in the liquid crystal element at regular intervals. It is preferable to use a reverse drive that drives the vehicle. Examples of the inverting drive include a frame inverting drive, a source line inverting drive, a gate line inverting drive, a dot inverting drive, and the like.

The frame inversion drive is a drive method in which the polarity of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is inverted every one frame period. The one-frame period corresponds to the period for displaying an image for one pixel, and the period is not particularly limited, but at least 1/60 second so that the viewer does not feel flicker. The following is preferable.

It is desirable to further shorten the period and increase the frequency to reduce image blurring in moving images. Desirably, the period is 1/120 second or less (frequency is 120 Hz or more). More preferably, the period is 1/180 second or less (frequency is 180 Hz or more). When the frame frequency is improved in this way, it is necessary to interpolate the image data when it does not match the frame frequency of the original image data. In this case, the motion vector can be used to interpolate the image data so that the image data can be displayed at a high frame frequency. As described above, the movement of the image is displayed smoothly, and it is possible to display with less afterimage.

Further, in the source line inversion drive, the polarity of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element belonging to the pixel connected to the same signal line is inverted with respect to the liquid crystal element belonging to the pixel connected to the adjacent signal line, and further. This is a driving method for performing frame inversion for each pixel. On the other hand, the gate line inversion drive is the polarity of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element belonging to the pixel connected to the same scanning line.
This is a driving method in which a liquid crystal element belonging to a pixel connected to an adjacent scanning line is inverted, and a frame is inverted for each pixel. Further, the dot inversion drive is a drive method in which the polarity of the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element is inverted between adjacent pixels, and is a drive method in which the source line inversion drive and the gate line inversion drive are combined.

By the way, the above-mentioned frame inversion drive, source line inversion drive, gate line inversion drive,
When the dot inversion drive or the like is adopted, the width of the potential required for the image signal written in the signal line is doubled as compared with the case where the inversion drive is not performed. Therefore, in order to solve this problem, in the case of frame inversion drive or gate line inversion drive, a common inversion drive that inverts the potential of the common electrode may be adopted.

The common inversion drive is a drive method in which the potential of the common electrode is changed in synchronization with the inversion of the polarity applied to the liquid crystal element. The width can be reduced. In this case, it is preferable that the common electrode 118 and the Cs wire 119 (Cs wire Cs_1 to Cs_n in FIG. 11) are electrically connected. The same signal will be input to the common electrode 118 and the Cs line 119, so that it can be displayed more appropriately.

Next, FIG. 12 shows an example of a pixel configuration in which dot inversion drive can be realized. In FIG. 12, four pixels are taken out and described, and each pixel has the configuration shown in FIG. In the figure, the signal lines 116_1 and 116_2 are the signal lines 116 in FIG. 4, and the scanning lines 117.
_1, 117_2 are on scanning line 117, Cs line 119_1, 119_2, 719_1, 71.
9_2 corresponds to Cs line 119. Signals of different polarities are input to the signal lines 116_1 and 116_2. Depending on the polarity, even pixels belonging to the same row are different from adjacent pixels.
The s line, that is, the Cs line 119_1, 719_2 or 119_1, 719_2 is used to supply a potential different from that of the adjacent pixel as shown in FIG. Dot inversion drive may be performed by driving as shown in FIG.

The signal for displaying black in the case of normally black and the signal for displaying white in the case of normally white are | Vsig (0) |, and the potential of the common electrode is Vcom.
Then, when a positive signal is supplied to the pixel from the signal line, Vcom or more Vsig (
0) It suffices if a potential of + Vcom or less is supplied to the Cs line. On the other hand, when a negative electrode signal is supplied to the pixel, a potential of −Vsig (0) + Vcom or more and Vcom or less may be supplied to the Cs line.

When a positive signal is supplied to the pixel, Vcom + α or more Vsig (0) + V
-Vsig (0) + Vc when a negative signal with a potential of com or less is supplied to the pixel
It is preferable that a potential of om or more and Vcom-α or less is supplied to the Cs line. Where α is V
sig / 2. Further, more preferably, V when a positive signal is supplied to the pixel.
The potential of sig (0) + Vcom is -Vsig when a negative signal is supplied to the pixel.
It is preferable that a potential of (0) + Vcom is supplied.

In this way, the potential of the Cs line is Vsig (0) when a positive signal is supplied to the pixel.
) + Vcom, and when a negative signal is supplied, -Vsig (0) + Vcom makes it possible to increase the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 122, and the second liquid crystal. The control of the element 122 can be facilitated.

When a positive signal is supplied to the pixel, the potential of the Cs line is changed to Vsig (0) + Vco.
If the potential is higher than m, a voltage higher than Vsig (0) is always applied to the liquid crystal.
It is not possible to display black when it is normally black and white when it is normally white. Further, when a negative signal is supplied to the pixel, −Vsig (0) +
When a potential lower than Vcom is supplied to the Cs line, it becomes impossible to display black in the case of normally black and white in the case of normally white, as in the case of a positive signal.

In FIG. 13, the potential of Vcom is 0 V, and Cs when a positive signal is supplied to the pixel.
The potential of the line is Vsig (0), and the potential of the Cs line when a negative signal is supplied to the pixel is -V.
The case where sig (0) is set is described.

The reverse drive method is not limited to the above.

Further, although FIGS. 1 to 12 described above show a case where two liquid crystal elements are provided in one pixel, the number of liquid crystal elements included in the pixel is not particularly limited. FIG. 14 shows a case where three liquid crystal elements are included in one pixel. The pixel shown in FIG. 14 has a fourth transistor 814, a third liquid crystal element 823, and a third holding capacity 833, in addition to the pixel configuration shown in FIG. In FIG. 14, the pixel electrode of the third liquid crystal element 823 is connected to the signal line 116 via the second transistor 212 and the first switch 111. Further, the third liquid crystal element 8
Assuming that the connection point between the pixel electrode of 23 and the second transistor 212 is the node 800, the node 800 is connected to the node 142 via the fourth transistor 814. The gate electrode of the fourth transistor 814 is connected to the scanning line 117 like the second transistor 212 and the third transistor 213. Further, the node 800 is connected to the Cs line 119 via a third holding capacity 833. Thus, in FIG. 14, the transistor 8
The unit 801 having the 14, the liquid crystal element 823, and the holding capacity 833 is provided between the second transistor 212 and the node 142. When increasing the number of liquid crystal elements included in the pixels, for example, the number of units 801 may be increased. Of course, it is not limited to this.

Further, one pixel may have a plurality of the above-mentioned pixel configurations. An example of such a pixel configuration is shown in FIG. The pixel shown in FIG. 15 has two sub-pixels 900a and 900b, and these sub-pixels are used to express the gradation of one pixel. In FIG. 15, each of the sub-pixels has a pixel configuration shown in FIG. However, the signal line 116 and the scanning line 117 connected to the sub-pixels 900a and 900b are shared and used among the sub-pixels. In addition, it should be noted.
The Cs line 119a and 119b in the figure correspond to the Cs line 119 in FIG. Each of the Cs lines 119 connected to the sub-pixels 900a and 900b, that is, the Cs lines 119a and 119b.
By supplying different potentials to the liquid crystal elements, different voltages can be applied to the liquid crystal elements belonging to the respective sub-pixels. In this way, it is possible to further improve the viewing angle by utilizing the difference in the orientation of the liquid crystal in each sub-pixel.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the case where the signal line 116 and the scanning line 117 are used as common wiring between the sub pixels is shown, but as shown in FIG. 16, only the scanning line 117 is used as the sub pixel 1.
It may be shared between 000a and 1000b. Further, as shown in FIG. 17, only the signal line 116 may be shared between the sub-pixels 1100a and 1100b, and the gradation of one pixel may be expressed by using these sub-pixels. The wiring shared and used between the sub-pixels is not limited to the above, and C.
It may be the s line 119, or two or more wires may be shared as shown in FIG. The signal lines 116a and 116b in FIG. 16 or 17 correspond to the signal lines 116 in FIG. 4, and the scanning lines 117a and 117b are connected to the scanning lines 117 in FIG. 4 and the Cs lines 119a and 119b.
Corresponds to Cs line 119 in FIG.

Further, although FIGS. 15 to 17 show a case where one pixel is configured from sub-pixels having the same configuration, the configuration may be different between the sub-pixels.

As described above, the viewing angle characteristics can be improved by the present invention. Further, since the configuration can be driven without causing a decrease in contrast, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device having higher display quality.

In this embodiment, the first switch 111 and the second switch 112 shown in FIG. 1 are mainly used.
And the case where the third switch 113 is controlled at the same time has been described, but each switch may be controlled separately. For example, in addition to the scanning lines 117 shown in FIG. 2, other scanning lines may be used for separate control. Alternatively, some of the plurality of switches may be controlled at the same time, and the remaining switches may be controlled separately. Further, in the above, the resistor and the switch may be replaced with a capacitance.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied, combined, or replaced with respect to the content (which may be part) described in the figure of another embodiment. You can do such things freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments are improved as an example when they are embodied, an example when they are slightly deformed, and an example when a part is changed. An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of related parts, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiments.

(Embodiment 2)
In this embodiment, a configuration different from that of the first embodiment is shown in FIG. In the first embodiment, the potential applied to the pixel electrodes of the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element is determined by the resistance division between the signal line and the Cs line, but it does not necessarily have to be the Cs line. .. An example thereof is shown in this embodiment.

The pixel 1200 shown in FIG. 18 includes a switch 111, a transistor 212, and a transistor 2.
13. It has a first liquid crystal element 121, a second liquid crystal element 122, a first holding capacity 131, and a second holding capacity 132. The pixel 1200 is connected to the signal line 116, the scanning line 117, the Cs line 119, and the potential supply line 1219. That is, the pixel 1200 is the embodiment 1.
In the pixel of FIG. 4 shown by, one electrode of the transistor 213 is not the Cs line 119, but
It is configured to be connected to the potential supply line 1219. Of course, reference numerals indicating the same thing are commonly used in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted. Note that FIG. 18 shows four pixels 1200 taken out.

Also in the pixel 1200 shown in FIG. 18, the frame inversion drive, the source line inversion drive, the gate line inversion drive, and the dot inversion drive can be appropriately selected and used. Although it depends on the driving method, the potential supply line 1219 may be supplied with a constant potential during one frame period. For example, one scanning line selection period, that is, the floor of each pixel belongs to a certain row. The potential corresponding to the key may be changed for each input period.

Further, as shown in the first embodiment, a transistor can be used for the switch 111 in FIG. 18, and each of the transistor 212 and the transistor 213 can be replaced with a switch and a resistor. In addition, the pixel 1200 in FIG. 18 can be appropriately combined with the items described in the first embodiment.

It is also possible to input an image signal to the potential supply line 1219 shown in FIG. 18 so that the potential supply line 1219 and the signal line 116 are reversed to function. In this way, by changing the wiring for inputting the image signal, that is, the potential according to the gradation of the pixels, one liquid crystal element, for example, the first liquid crystal element 121 is applied as compared with the other, for example, the second liquid crystal element 122. It is possible to prevent the voltage from constantly increasing. Therefore, the deterioration of the liquid crystal element can be delayed.

A display device having such pixels will be described with reference to FIG. The display device includes a signal line drive circuit 511, a signal line switching circuit 1300, a scanning line drive circuit 512, and a pixel unit 51.
3 is used, and the wiring for supplying the image signal is switched by using the signal line switching circuit 1300.
The display device shown in FIG. 19 is provided with a signal line switching circuit 1300 in addition to the configuration of the display device shown in FIG. The pixel unit 513 has a signal line switching circuit 1300.
Multiple wirings 1316 and 1319 extending in the column direction from the scanning line G1 to Gn and Cs lines Cs_1 to Cs_n extending in the row direction from the scanning line drive circuit 512.
, And a plurality of pixels 1200 arranged in a matrix corresponding to the wiring 1316. Then, each pixel 1200 has a wiring 1316, a wiring 1319, and a scanning line Gi (scanning lines G1 to 1).
Any one of Gn) is connected to the Cs line Cs_i. The wiring 1316 and the wiring 1319 are respectively signal line Sj (signal line S1) via the signal line switching circuit 1300.
It is connected to any one of ~ Sm) and the potential supply line Sj_2. Of course, when the wiring for supplying the image signal is only the signal line, the signal line switching circuit 1300
Is unnecessary.

The signal line switching circuit 1300 will be described with reference to FIG. Signal line switching circuit 1
Reference numeral 300 denotes m units 140 corresponding to the pixels 1200 in the column direction of the pixel portion.
It has 0, an inverter 1401, a wiring 1402, and a wiring 1403 connected via the wiring 1402 and the inverter 1401. Each unit 1400 is a transistor 1404
, Transistor 1405, transistor 1406, transistor 1407, wiring 1
402, wiring 1403, signal line Sj, potential supply line Sj_2, wiring 1316, wiring 1319
Is connected to. The signal line Sj is connected to the wiring 1316 via the transistor 1404 and the wiring 1319 via the transistor 1405, and the potential supply line Sj_2 is connected to the wiring 1319 via the transistor 1406 and the wiring 1316 via the transistor 1407.
Is connected to. The transistor 1405 and the transistor 1407 are wired 140.
2 controls the on / off of the transistor 1404 and the transistor 1406 by the wiring 1403.

A signal synchronized with one scanning line period or one frame period is input to the wiring 1402, and the signal is input to the wiring 1402.
The inverted signal of the signal input to the wiring 1402 via the inverter 1401 is input to the wiring 1430. Therefore, when the transistor 1405 and the transistor 1407 are turned off, the transistor 1404 and the transistor 1406 are turned on, and when the transistor 1405 and the transistor 1407 are turned on, the transistor 1 is turned on.
The 404 and transistor 1406 are off. In this way, it is possible to select whether to connect the signal line Sj and the potential supply line Sj_2 to the wiring 1316 or the wiring 1319. The signal to be input to the wiring 1402 may be appropriately selected by the method of inverting drive.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the Cs line 119 may be replaced by the scanning line 117 in the previous line. Here, the case where the Cs line 119 and the scanning line 117 in the previous line are shared is shown.
The present invention is not particularly limited as long as an arbitrary constant potential can be supplied to the second electrode of the first holding capacity 131 and the second holding capacity 132, not limited to the Cs wire 119. In addition, during one frame period, the first
It is preferable that the second electrode of the holding capacity 131 and the second holding capacity 132 of the above does not fluctuate.
As shown in FIG. 21, it can be used because it does not significantly affect the orientation of the liquid crystals of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 if it is just before moving to the next frame period. In this way, by sharing the wiring with the previous row, it is possible to reduce the number of wirings possessed by one pixel, and it is possible to improve the aperture ratio.

Even in the pixel configuration as described above, as in the first embodiment, the gradation expressed by the pixel is determined by the orientation of the liquid crystal possessed by each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 in the pixel. Therefore, the viewing angle can be improved. Further, since the configuration can be driven without causing a decrease in contrast, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device having higher display quality.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied, combined, or replaced with respect to the content (which may be part) described in the figure of another embodiment. You can do such things freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments are improved as an example when they are embodied, an example when they are slightly deformed, and an example when a part is changed. An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of related parts, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiments.

(Embodiment 3)
In this embodiment, an example of a pixel configuration different from those of the first and second embodiments will be described. Figure 2
The pixels shown in 2 include a switch 111, a transistor 212, a transistor 213, a first liquid crystal element 121, a second liquid crystal element 122, a first holding capacity 131, a second holding capacity 132, and a third holding capacity 1601. Have. The pixel shown in FIG. 22 is connected to the signal line 116, the scanning line 117, and the Cs line 119, and is located between the node 142 and one electrode of the transistor 213 in the pixel of FIG. 4 shown in the first embodiment. A third holding capacity 1601 is provided in the configuration. Reference numerals indicating the same as those in FIG. 4 are commonly used in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The pixels shown in FIG. 22 can be operated in the same manner as the pixels shown in FIG. However, by providing the third holding capacity 1601, it takes time to reach the potential corresponding to the gradation to be supplied to the pixel electrodes of the second liquid crystal element 122. Therefore, the first liquid crystal element 1
The viewing angle can be further improved by intentionally slowing down the response of the liquid crystal contained in the second liquid crystal element 122 having a voltage applied lower than 21. Even in this case, since the gradation expressed by the pixel is determined by the orientation of the liquid crystal possessed by each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 in the pixel, the potential supplied from the signal line 116 is determined by these. To decide in consideration of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the third holding capacitance 1701 includes the transistor 212 and the node 14.
It may be provided between 2 and 2. In FIG. 23, the operation can be performed in the same manner as the pixels shown in FIG. Similar to the pixels shown in FIG. 22, it takes time for the pixel electrodes of the second liquid crystal element 122 to reach the potential corresponding to the gradation to be supplied. By utilizing this, the viewing angle can be further improved. In this case, the signal line 1 takes into consideration that the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 122 is determined by the capacitance division with the third holding capacitance 1701.
It is necessary to determine the potential supplied from 16.

Even in the pixel configuration as described above, as in the first embodiment, the gradation expressed by the pixel is determined by the orientation of the liquid crystal possessed by each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 in the pixel. Therefore, the viewing angle can be improved. Further, since the configuration can be driven without causing a decrease in contrast, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device having higher display quality.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied, combined, or replaced with respect to the content (which may be part) described in the figure of another embodiment. You can do such things freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments are improved as an example when they are embodied, an example when they are slightly deformed, and an example when a part is changed. An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of related parts, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiments.

(Embodiment 4)
In this embodiment, an example of a pixel configuration different from those of the first to third embodiments will be described. Figure 2
The pixels shown in 4 are a switch 111, a transistor 212, a transistor 213, a transistor 1804, a first liquid crystal element 121, a second liquid crystal element 122, and a first holding capacity 131.
It has a second holding capacity 132 and a third holding capacity 1801. The pixel shown in FIG. 24 is connected to the signal line 116, the scanning line 117, and the Cs line 119, and the pixel of FIG. 4 shown in the first embodiment is further provided with the transistor 1804 and the third holding capacity 1801. It has a structure that has been set. Reference numerals indicating the same as those in FIG. 4 are commonly used in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As for the third holding capacity 1801, assuming that the connection point between the node 142 and the wiring connecting the first electrode of the second holding capacity 132 and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 is the node 1802. It is provided between the node 1802 and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122. Further, the transistor 1804 is provided between the node 1803 and the signal line 116, assuming that the connection point between the third holding capacitance 1801 and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 is the node 1803. That is, the node 1803 is connected to the signal line 116 via the transistor 1804. Like the switch 111, the transistor 212, and the transistor 213, the transistor 1804 is controlled to be turned on and off by a signal input to the scanning line 117.

The pixels shown in FIG. 24 can be operated in the same manner as the pixels shown in FIG. In the pixels shown in FIG. 24, potentials corresponding to the pixel gradations of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 are simultaneously applied to the pixel electrodes of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 from the signal line 116 via the switch 111 and the transistor 1804, respectively. Be supplied. Therefore, the potential corresponding to the gradation of the pixels can be supplied to the pixel electrodes of each liquid crystal element more quickly. Therefore, it is effective at high speed operation and the like. The on-resistance of the transistor 1804 is preferably larger than the on-resistance of the switch 111 or the transistor 212. Assuming that the channel width of the transistor 1804 is W4 and the channel length is L4, it is preferable that W4 / L4 is small. Further, also in the pixel shown in FIG. 24, the gradation expressed by the pixel is determined by the orientation of the liquid crystal possessed by each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 in the pixel, so that the viewing angle is improved. be able to.

As described above, the viewing angle characteristics can be improved by the present invention. Further, since the configuration can be driven without causing a decrease in contrast, it is possible to provide a liquid crystal display device having higher display quality.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied, combined, or replaced with respect to the content (which may be part) described in the figure of another embodiment. You can do such things freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments are improved as an example when they are embodied, an example when they are slightly deformed, and an example when a part is changed. An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of related parts, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiments.

(Embodiment 5)
In this embodiment, an example of a pixel configuration different from those of the first to fourth embodiments will be described. FIG. 25
The pixel shown in (1) has a switch 111, a transistor 212, a transistor 213, a first liquid crystal element 121, a second liquid crystal element 122, a first holding capacity 131, a second holding capacity 132, and a third holding capacity 1901. .. The pixels shown in FIG. 25 are signal line 116 and scanning line 1.
It is connected to 17 and the Cs line 119, and has a configuration in which a third holding capacity 1901 is further provided in the pixel of FIG. 4 shown in the first embodiment. Reference numerals indicating the same as those in FIG. 4 are commonly used in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The third holding capacity 1901 is based on the assumption that the connection point between the node 142 and the wiring to which the first electrode of the second holding capacity 132 and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122 is connected is node 1902. It is provided between the node 1902 and the pixel electrode of the second liquid crystal element 122.

The pixels shown in FIG. 25 can be operated in the same manner as the pixels shown in FIG. However, by providing the third holding capacity 1901, it takes time to reach the potential corresponding to the gradation to be supplied to the pixel electrodes of the second liquid crystal element 122. By utilizing this, the viewing angle can be further improved. Further, since the voltage applied to the second liquid crystal element 122 is determined by the capacity division with the third holding capacity 1901, it is effective when a small voltage is to be applied to the second liquid crystal element 122.

Also in the pixel according to the present embodiment, the gradation expressed by the pixel is determined by the orientation of the liquid crystal possessed by each of the first liquid crystal element 121 and the second liquid crystal element 122 in the pixel, so that the viewing angle is improved. be able to.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied, combined, or replaced with respect to the content (which may be part) described in the figure of another embodiment. You can do such things freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments are improved as an example when they are embodied, an example when they are slightly deformed, and an example when a part is changed. An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of related parts, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiments.

(Embodiment 6)
In the present embodiment, the pixel structure of the display device will be described. In particular, the pixel structure of the liquid crystal display device will be described.

The pixel structure when each liquid crystal mode and the transistor are combined will be described with reference to the cross-sectional view of the pixel.

As the transistor, a thin film transistor (TFT) having a non-single crystal semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystal (also referred to as microcrystal or semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used. Further, as the structure of the transistor, a top gate type, a bottom gate type, or the like can be used. As the bottom gate type transistor, a channel etch type, a channel protection type, or the like can be used.

FIG. 28 is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when the TN method and the transistor are combined.
The features of the pixel structure shown in FIG. 28 will be described.

The liquid crystal molecule 2018 shown in FIG. 28 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis. here,
The orientation of the liquid crystal molecules 2018 is represented by the lengths of the liquid crystal molecules shown in the figure. That is,
The long-represented liquid crystal molecule 2018 has a major axis orientation parallel to the paper surface (cross-sectional direction shown in FIG. 28), and the shorter-represented liquid crystal molecule 2018 has a long-axis orientation normal to the paper surface. Suppose it is close to. The liquid crystal molecule 2018 shown in FIG. 28 is the first substrate 2001.
The orientation of the long axis of the liquid crystal molecules differs by 90 degrees between the one close to the substrate and the one close to the second substrate 2016, and the orientation of the major axis of the liquid crystal molecule 2018 located in the middle of these substrates makes them smooth. It is oriented like a connection. That is, the liquid crystal molecule 2018 shown in FIG. 28 is the first
The orientation state is such that the substrate 2001 and the second substrate 2016 are twisted by 90 degrees.

A case where a bottom gate type transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor will be described. When a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost by using a large-area substrate.

The liquid crystal display device has a core portion called a liquid crystal panel for displaying an image. The liquid crystal panel consists of two processed substrates that are bonded together with a gap of several micrometers.
It is produced by injecting a liquid crystal material between two substrates. That is, the liquid crystal is the first substrate and the second
It is configured to be sandwiched between two substrates of the above substrate. In FIG. 28, the liquid crystal 201
1 is sandwiched between the first substrate 2001 and the second substrate 2016. First substrate 200
A transistor and a pixel electrode are formed on the first substrate, and a light-shielding film 201 is formed on the second substrate 2016.
4. The color filter 2015, the fourth conductive layer 2013, the spacer 2017, and the second alignment film 2012 are formed.

By providing the light-shielding film 2014, it is possible to obtain a display device having less light leakage when displaying black. The light-shielding film 2014 may not be particularly formed on the second substrate 2016. When the light-shielding film 2014 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved.

Further, the color filter 2015 may not be formed on the second substrate 2016. Even when the color filter 2015 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced as in the case of the light-shielding film, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved. However,
Even when the color filter 2015 is not formed, it is possible to obtain a display device capable of color display by field sequential drive.

Further, a spherical spacer may be sprayed instead of the spacer 2017. When the spherical spacer is sprayed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 2017 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made constant more easily, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained.

Next, the processing performed on the first substrate 2001 will be described.

First, a first insulating film 2002 is formed on the first substrate 2001 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 2002 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. However, when quartz is used as the substrate 2001, the first insulating film 2002 may not be formed.

Next, the first conductive layer 2003 is formed on the first insulating film 2002 by using a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the second insulating film 2004 is formed on the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 2004 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor.

Next, the first semiconductor layer 2005 and the second semiconductor layer 2006 are formed. The first semiconductor layer 2005 and the second semiconductor layer 2006 are continuously formed, and these shapes are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 2007 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. It is preferable to use dry etching as the etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 2007 is processed. As the second conductive layer 2007, a transparent material may be used, or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 2006 is etched using the second conductive layer 2007 as a mask. Also,
The mask may be etched using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 2007. Then, the first semiconductor layer 2005 in the portion where the second semiconductor layer 2006 is removed becomes the channel region of the transistor. By forming the channel region in this way, the number of masks can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 2008 is formed, and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 2008. At the same time that the contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 2008, the contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 2004 as well. The surface of the third insulating film 2008 is preferably as flat as possible. This is because the unevenness of the surface in contact with the liquid crystal, that is, the surface of the third insulating film 2008, affects the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules.

Next, the third conductive layer 2009 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the first alignment film 2010 is formed. After forming the first alignment film 2010, a rubbing treatment may be performed to control the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules.

The first substrate 2001 produced as described above, the light-shielding film 2014, and the color filter 2015.
, The second with the fourth conductive layer 2013, the spacer 2017 and the second alignment film 2012 formed.
Is bonded to the substrate 2016 with a sealing material with a gap of several micrometers. Then, the liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. In the TN method, the fourth conductive layer 2013 is formed on the entire surface of the second substrate 2016.

FIG. 29 (A) shows MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignm).
This is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when the ent) method and a transistor are combined. FIG. 29
By applying the pixel structure shown in (A) to the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the viewing angle can be further increased.

The characteristics of the pixel structure of the MVA type liquid crystal panel will be described with reference to the pixel structure shown in FIG. 29 (A). The liquid crystal molecule 2118 shown in FIG. 29 (A) is the liquid crystal molecule 201 shown in FIG. 28.
Similar to 8, it is an elongated molecule with a major axis and a minor axis. Therefore, also in FIG. 29 (A), the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules 2118 is represented by the length of the liquid crystal molecules shown in the figure. That is, FIG.
The liquid crystal molecule 2118 shown in 9 (A) is oriented so that its long axis is oriented in the normal direction with respect to the alignment film. Further, the liquid crystal molecules 2118 in the portion of the orientation control protrusion 2119 are radially oriented around the orientation control protrusion 2119. In this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

A case where a bottom gate type transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor will be described. When a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost by using a large-area substrate.

In FIG. 29A, the two substrates sandwiching the liquid crystal 2111 correspond to the first substrate 2101 and the second substrate 2116. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate 2101, and the light-shielding film 2114 and the color filter 2115 are formed on the second substrate 2116.
A fourth conductive layer 2113, a spacer 2117, a second alignment film 2112, and an orientation control protrusion 2119 are formed.

By providing the light-shielding film 2114, it is possible to obtain a display device having less light leakage when displaying black. The light-shielding film 2114 may not be particularly formed on the second substrate 2116. When the light-shielding film 2114 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved.

Further, the color filter 2115 may not be formed on the second substrate 2116. Even when the color filter 2115 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced as in the case of the light-shielding film, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved. However,
Even when the color filter 2115 is not formed, it is possible to obtain a display device capable of color display by field sequential drive.

Further, a spherical spacer may be sprayed instead of the spacer 2117. When the spherical spacer is sprayed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacers 2117 are formed, the positions of the spacers do not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made constant more easily, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained.

The processing performed on the first substrate 2101 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 2102 is formed on the first substrate 2101 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 2102 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. However, when quartz is used as the substrate 2101, the first insulating film 2102 may not be formed.

Next, the first conductive layer 2103 is formed on the first insulating film 2102 by using a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the second insulating film 2104 is formed on the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 2104 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor.

Next, the first semiconductor layer 2105 and the second semiconductor layer 2106 are formed. The first semiconductor layer 2105 and the second semiconductor layer 2106 are continuously formed, and these shapes are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 2107 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. It is preferable to use dry etching as the etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 2107 is processed. As the second conductive layer 2107, a transparent material may be used, or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 225 is etched using the second conductive layer 2107 as a mask. Further, the mask may be etched by using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 2107. Then, the first semiconductor layer 2105 of the portion from which the second semiconductor layer 2106 is removed becomes the channel region of the transistor. By forming the channel region in this way, the number of masks can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 2108 is formed, and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 2108. At the same time that the contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 2108, the contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 2104 as well.

Next, the third conductive layer 2109 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the first alignment film 2110 is formed. After forming the first alignment film 2110, a rubbing treatment may be performed in order to control the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules.

The first substrate 2101 produced as described above, the light-shielding film 2114, and the color filter 2115.
, A second in which a fourth conductive layer 2113, a spacer 2117, and a second alignment film 2112 were prepared.
The substrate 2116 is bonded to the substrate 2116 with a sealing material with a gap of several micrometers. Then, the liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates.

In the MVA method, the fourth conductive layer 2113 is formed on the entire surface of the second substrate 2116. Further, an orientation control protrusion 2119 is formed in contact with the fourth conductive layer 2113. The shape of the orientation control protrusion 2119 is preferably a shape having a smooth curved surface. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the misalignment of the liquid crystal molecules 2118 due to the orientation control protrusions 2119. Further, since it is possible to prevent the alignment film formed on the alignment control protrusion 2119 from being cut off, it is possible to reduce the defect of the alignment film due to the step breakage.

FIG. 29 (B) shows PVA (Paterned Vertical Alignment).
This is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when a method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 29 (B) to the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the viewing angle can be further increased.

The features of the pixel structure shown in FIG. 29B will be described. Liquid crystal molecule 2 shown in FIG. 29 (B)
Similar to the liquid crystal molecule 2018 shown in FIG. 28, 148 also has the liquid crystal molecule 2 in FIG. 29 (B).
The orientation of 148 is represented by the length of the liquid crystal molecules shown in the figure. Therefore, FIG. 29 (B)
The liquid crystal molecule 2148 shown in () is oriented so that its long axis is oriented in the normal direction with respect to the alignment film. Further, the liquid crystal molecules 2148 existing around the electrode cutout portion 2149 on which the fourth conductive layer 2143 is not provided are radially oriented around the boundary between the electrode cutout portion 2149 and the fourth conductive layer 2143. In this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

A case where a bottom gate type transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor will be described. When a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost by using a large-area substrate.

In FIG. 29B, the two substrates sandwiching the liquid crystal 2141 correspond to the first substrate 2131 and the second substrate 2146. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate 2131, and the light-shielding film 2144 and the color filter 2145 are formed on the second substrate 2146.
A fourth conductive layer 2143, a spacer 2147, and a second alignment film 2142 are formed.

By providing the light-shielding film 2144, it is possible to obtain a display device having less light leakage when displaying black. The light-shielding film 2144 may not be particularly formed on the second substrate 2146. When the light-shielding film 2144 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved.

Further, the color filter 2145 may not be formed on the second substrate 2146. Even when the color filter 2145 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced as in the case of the light-shielding film, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved. However,
Even when the color filter 2145 is not formed, it is possible to obtain a display device capable of color display by field sequential drive.

Further, a spherical spacer may be sprayed instead of the spacer 2147. When the spherical spacer is sprayed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 2147 is formed, the positions of the spacers do not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made constant more easily, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained.

The processing performed on the first substrate 2131 will be described.

First, the first insulating film 2132 is formed on the first substrate 2131 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 2132 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. However, it should be noted
When quartz is used as the substrate 2131, the first insulating film 2132 may not be formed.

Next, the first conductive layer 2133 is formed on the first insulating film 2132 by using a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the second insulating film 2134 is formed on the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 2134 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor.

Next, the first semiconductor layer 2135 and the second semiconductor layer 2136 are formed. The first semiconductor layer 2135 and the second semiconductor layer 2136 are continuously formed, and these shapes are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 2137 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. It is preferable to use dry etching as the etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 2137 is processed. As the second conductive layer 2137, a transparent material may be used, or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 2136 is etched using the second conductive layer 2137 as a mask. Also,
The mask may be etched using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 2137. Then, the first semiconductor layer 2135 of the portion from which the second semiconductor layer 2136 is removed becomes the channel region of the transistor. By forming the channel region in this way, the number of masks can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 2138 is formed, and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 2138. At the same time that the contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 2138, the contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 2134 as well.

Next, the third conductive layer 2139 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the first alignment film 2140 is formed. After forming the first alignment film 2140, a rubbing treatment may be performed in order to control the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules.

The first substrate 2131 produced as described above, the light-shielding film 2144, and the color filter 2145.
, The fourth conductive layer 2143, the spacer 2147, and the second substrate 2146 on which the second alignment film 2142 is formed are bonded to each other with a sealing material with a gap of several micrometers. Then, the liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates.

In the PVA method, the fourth conductive layer 2143 is patterned to form the electrode cutout portion 2149. The shape of the electrode cutout portion 2149 is not particularly limited, but a shape in which a plurality of rectangles having different orientations are combined is preferable. By doing this,
Since a plurality of regions having different orientations can be formed, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained. The shape of the fourth conductive layer 2143 at the boundary between the electrode cutout portion 2149 and the fourth conductive layer 2143 preferably has a smooth slope with respect to the base thereof. By doing so, the misalignment of the liquid crystal molecules 2148 adjacent to the slope is reduced. Further, since it is possible to prevent the alignment film formed on the fourth conductive layer 2143 from being cut off, it is possible to reduce the defect of the alignment film due to the step breakage.

FIG. 30A is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when an IPS (In-Plane-Switching) method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 30 (A) to the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the viewing angle can be further increased.

The features of the pixel structure shown in FIG. 30 (A) will be described. Liquid crystal molecule 2 shown in FIG. 30 (A)
248 is an elongated molecule having a major axis and a minor axis, similar to the liquid crystal molecule 2018 shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, also in FIG. 30 (A), the direction of the liquid crystal molecule 2218 is represented by the length of the liquid crystal molecule shown in the figure. That is, the liquid crystal molecule 2218 shown in FIG. 30 (A) is oriented so that its long axis always faces the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate. FIG. 30 (A)
In the liquid crystal molecule 2 in a state where an electric field is not generated in the region where the liquid crystal 2211 exists.
Although it represents 218 orientation, when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecule 2218, it rotates in a horizontal plane while always maintaining the direction of its major axis horizontal to the substrate. In this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

A case where a bottom gate type transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor will be described. When a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost by using a large-area substrate.

In FIG. 30A, the two substrates sandwiching the liquid crystal 2211 correspond to the first substrate 2201 and the second substrate 2216. A transistor and a pixel electrode are formed on the first substrate 2201, and a light-shielding film 2214 and a color filter 2215 are formed on the second substrate 2216.
, Spacer 2217, and a second alignment film 2212 are formed.

By providing the light-shielding film 2214, it is possible to obtain a display device having less light leakage when displaying black. The light-shielding film 2214 may not be particularly formed on the second substrate 2216. When the light-shielding film 2214 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved.

Further, the color filter 2215 may not be formed on the second substrate 2216. Even when the color filter 2215 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced as in the case of the light-shielding film, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved. However,
Even when the color filter 2215 is not formed, it is possible to obtain a display device capable of color display by field sequential drive.

Further, a spherical spacer may be sprayed instead of the spacer 2217. When the spherical spacer is sprayed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 2217 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made constant more easily, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained.

The processing performed on the first substrate 2201 will be described.

First, a first insulating film 2202 is formed on the first substrate 2201 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 2202 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. However, when quartz is used as the substrate 2201, the first insulating film 2202 may not be formed.

Next, the first conductive layer 2203 is formed on the first insulating film 2202 by using a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the second insulating film 2204 is formed on the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 2204 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor.

Next, the first semiconductor layer 2205 and the second semiconductor layer 2206 are formed. The first semiconductor layer 2205 and the second semiconductor layer 2206 are continuously formed into a film, and these shapes are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 2207 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. It is preferable to use dry etching as the etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 2207 is processed. As the second conductive layer 2207, a transparent material may be used, or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 2206 is etched using the second conductive layer 2207 as a mask. Also,
The mask may be etched using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 2207. Then, the first semiconductor layer 2205 of the portion from which the second semiconductor layer 2206 is removed becomes the channel region of the transistor. By forming the channel region in this way, the number of masks can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 2208 is formed, and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 2208. At the same time that the contact hole is formed in the third insulating film 2208, the contact hole may be formed in the second insulating film 2204 as well.

Next, the third conductive layer 2209 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the shape of the third conductive layer 2209 is two comb teeth that mesh with each other. One comb-shaped electrode is electrically connected to one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor, and the other comb-shaped electrode is electrically connected to the common electrode. By doing so, a lateral electric field can be effectively applied to the liquid crystal molecules 2218.

Next, the first alignment film 2210 is formed. After forming the first alignment film 2210, a rubbing treatment may be performed in order to control the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules.

The first substrate 2201 produced as described above, the light-shielding film 2214, and the color filter 2215.
, Spacer 2217, and the second substrate 2216 on which the second alignment film 2212 is formed are bonded by a sealing material with a gap of several micrometers. Then, the liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates.

FIG. 30B is an example of a cross-sectional view of a pixel when the FFS (Fringe Field Switching) method and a transistor are combined. By applying the pixel structure shown in FIG. 30B to the liquid crystal display device of the present invention, the viewing angle can be further increased.

The features of the pixel structure shown in FIG. 30B will be described. Liquid crystal molecule 2 shown in FIG. 30 (B)
248, similar to the liquid crystal molecule 2018 shown in FIG. 28, the liquid crystal molecule 21 in FIG. 30 (B).
The orientation of 48 is represented by the length of the liquid crystal molecules shown in the figure. Therefore, FIG. 30 (B)
The liquid crystal molecule 2248 shown in 1 is oriented so that the direction of its long axis always faces the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate. In FIG. 30B, the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules 2248 in a state where no electric field is generated in the region where the liquid crystal 2241 exists, but when an electric field is applied to the liquid crystal molecules 2248, the direction of the major axis thereof. Rotates in a horizontal plane, always maintaining a horizontal orientation with respect to the substrate. In this state, a liquid crystal display device having a large viewing angle can be obtained.

A case where a bottom gate type transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used as the transistor will be described. When a transistor using an amorphous semiconductor is used, a liquid crystal display device can be manufactured at low cost by using a large-area substrate.

In FIG. 30B, the two substrates sandwiching the liquid crystal 2241 correspond to the first substrate 2231 and the second substrate 2246. Transistors and pixel electrodes are formed on the first substrate 2241, and the light-shielding film 2244 and the color filter 2245 are formed on the second substrate 2246.
A spacer 2247 and a second alignment film 2242 are formed.

By providing the light-shielding film 2244, it is possible to obtain a display device having less light leakage when displaying black. The light-shielding film 2244 may not be particularly formed on the second substrate 2246. When the light-shielding film 2244 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved.

Further, the color filter 2245 may not be formed on the second substrate 2246. Even when the color filter 2245 is not formed, the number of steps can be reduced as in the case of the light-shielding film, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the yield can be improved. However,
Even when the color filter 2245 is not formed, it is possible to obtain a display device capable of color display by field sequential drive.

Further, a spherical spacer may be sprayed instead of the spacer 2247. When the spherical spacer is sprayed, the number of steps is reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. In addition, the yield can be improved. On the other hand, when the spacer 2247 is formed, the position of the spacer does not vary, so that the distance between the two substrates can be made constant more easily, and a display device with less display unevenness can be obtained.

The processing performed on the first substrate 2231 will be described.

First, a first insulating film 2232 is formed on the first substrate 2231 by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The first insulating film 2232 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. However, it should be noted
When quartz is used as the substrate 2231, the first insulating film 2232 may not be formed.

Next, the first conductive layer 2233 is formed on the first insulating film 2232 by using a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, the second insulating film 2234 is formed on the entire surface by a sputtering method, a printing method, a coating method, or the like. The second insulating film 2234 has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor.

Next, the first semiconductor layer 2235 and the second semiconductor layer 2236 are formed. The first semiconductor layer 2235 and the second semiconductor layer 2236 are continuously formed, and these shapes are processed at the same time.

Next, the second conductive layer 2237 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. It is preferable to use dry etching as the etching method performed when the shape of the second conductive layer 2237 is processed. As the second conductive layer 2237, a transparent material may be used, or a reflective material may be used.

Next, a channel region of the transistor is formed. An example of the process will be described. The second semiconductor layer 2236 is etched using the second conductive layer 2237 as a mask. Also,
The mask may be etched using a mask for processing the shape of the second conductive layer 2237. Then, the first semiconductor layer 2235 of the portion from which the second semiconductor layer 2236 is removed becomes the channel region of the transistor. By forming the channel region in this way, the number of masks can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Next, a third insulating film 2238 is formed, and a contact hole is selectively formed in the third insulating film 2238.

Next, the third conductive layer 2239 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like.

Next, a fourth insulating film 2249 is formed, and a contact hole is selectively formed in the fourth insulating film 2249.

Next, the fourth conductive layer 2243 is formed by a photolithography method, a laser direct drawing method, an inkjet method, or the like. Here, the shape of the fourth conductive layer 2243 is comb-shaped.

Next, the first alignment film 2240 is formed. After forming the first alignment film 2240, a rubbing treatment may be performed in order to control the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules.

The first substrate 2231 prepared as described above, the light-shielding film 2244, and the color filter 2245.
, Spacer 2247, and the second substrate 2246 on which the second alignment film 2242 was prepared are bonded to each other with a gap of several micrometers by a sealing material, and a liquid crystal material is injected between the two substrates. A liquid crystal panel can be manufactured.

Here, the materials that can be used for each conductive layer or each insulating film will be described.

The first insulating film 2002 of FIG. 28, the first insulating film 2102 of FIG. 29 (A), the first insulating film 2132 of FIG. 29 (B), the first insulating film 2202 of FIG. 30 (A), FIG. The first insulating film 2232 of 30 (B) includes a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, or a silicon nitride film (Si).
An insulating film such as OxNy) can be used. In addition, these insulating films are silicon oxide films,
An insulating film having a laminated structure in which two or more films such as a silicon nitride film or a silicon oxide nitride film (SiOxNy) are combined can be used.

The first conductive layer 2003 of FIG. 28, the first conductive layer 2103 of FIG. 29 (A), the first conductive layer 2133 of FIG. 29 (B), the first conductive layer 2203 of FIG. 30 (A), FIG. As the first conductive layer 2233 of 30 (B), a conductive material such as Mo, Ti, Al, Nd, or Cr can be used. Further, these conductive layers are made of conductive materials such as Mo, Ti, Al, Nd, and Cr.
A laminated structure in which two or more are combined can also be used.

The second insulating film 2004 of FIG. 28, the second insulating film 2104 of FIG. 29 (A), the second insulating film 2134 of FIG. 29 (B), the second insulating film 2204 of FIG. 30 (A), FIG. As the second insulating film 2234 of 30 (B), a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon nitride nitride film, or the like can be used. Further, a laminated structure in which two or more of a thermal oxide film, a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film, a silicon oxide nitride film, and the like are combined can be used. The portion in contact with the semiconductor layer is preferably a silicon oxide film. This is because the silicon oxide film reduces the trap level at the interface with the semiconductor layer. The portion in contact with Mo is preferably a silicon nitride film. This is because the silicon nitride film does not oxidize Mo.

First semiconductor layer 2005 in FIG. 28, first semiconductor layer 2105 in FIG. 29 (A), FIG. 29 (B).
), The first semiconductor layer 2205 in FIG. 30 (A), and the first semiconductor layer 2235 in FIG. 30 (B), silicon, silicon germanium (SiGe), or the like can be used. ..

The second semiconductor layer 2006 of FIG. 28, the second semiconductor layer 2106 of FIG. 29 (A), and FIG. 29 (B).
2136, the second semiconductor layer 2206 in FIG. 30 (A), and the second semiconductor layer 2236 in FIG. 30 (B), silicon or the like containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

The second conductive layer 2007 and the third conductive layer 2009 of FIG. 28, the second conductive layer 2107 and the third conductive layer 2109 of FIG. 29 (A), the second conductive layer 2137 of FIG. 29 (B), and The second conductive layer 2139, the second conductive layer 2207 and the second conductive layer 2209 in FIG. 30 (A), or the second conductive layer 2237, the third conductive layer 2239 and the fourth in FIG. 30 (B). Conductive layer 224
Examples of the transparent material of 3 include an indium tin oxide (ITO) film in which indium oxide is mixed with tin oxide, an indium tin oxide (ITSO) film in which indium tin oxide (ITO) is mixed with silicon oxide, and the like. Indium tin oxide, which is a mixture of indium oxide and zinc oxide (
IZO) film, zinc oxide film, tin oxide film and the like can be used. In addition, IZO is I
It can be formed by sputtering using a target in which TO is mixed with 2 to 20 wt% zinc oxide (ZnO).

Further, the second conductive layer 2007 and the third conductive layer 2009 of FIG. 28, the second conductive layer 2107 and the third conductive layer 2109 of FIG. 29 (A), and the second conductive layer of FIG. 29 (B). 2137 and the second conductive layer 2139, the second conductive layer 2207 and the second conductive layer 2209 in FIG. 30 (A),
Alternatively, Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al or the like is used as the reflective material of the second conductive layer 2237, the second conductive layer 2239 and the fourth conductive layer 2243 in FIG. 30 (B). be able to. Alternatively, a two-layer structure in which Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W and Al are laminated,
A three-layer laminated structure in which Al is sandwiched between metals such as Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, and W may be used.

The third insulating film 2008 of FIG. 28, the third insulating film 2108 of FIG. 29 (A), the third insulating film 2138 of FIG. 29 (B), and the third conductive layer 2139 of FIG. 29 (B), FIG. The third insulating film 2208 of 30 (A), the third insulating film 2238 of FIG. 30 (B), and the fourth insulating film 2249 may be an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxide, etc.) or low. An organic compound material having a dielectric constant (photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material) or the like can be used. Further, a material containing siloxane can also be used. The siloxane is silicon (Si).
It is a material whose skeletal structure is composed of a bond between oxygen (O) and oxygen (O). As the substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group may be used as the substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as the substituent.

The first alignment film 2010 of FIG. 28, the first alignment film 2110 of FIG. 29 (A), the first alignment film 2140 of FIG. 29 (B), the first alignment film 2210 of FIG. 29 (B), FIG. As the first alignment film 2240 of 30 (B), a polymer film such as polyimide can be used.

Next, the pixel structure when each liquid crystal mode and the transistor are combined will be described with reference to the top view (layout view) of the pixels.

The liquid crystal mode includes TN (Twisted Nematic) mode and IPS (IPS).
In-Plane-Switching mode, FFS (Fringe Field)
Switching) mode, MVA (Multi-domain Vertical)
Alginment) mode, PVA (Patterned Vertical Ali)
symmetric), ASM (Axial symmetric symmetric Mi)
Cro-cell) mode, OCB (Optical Contracted Bir)
Efringence mode, FLC (Ferroelectric Liquid)
Crystal) mode, AFLC (Antiferroelectric Liqui)
d Crystal) and the like can be used.

As the transistor, a thin film transistor (TFT) having a non-single crystal semiconductor layer typified by amorphous silicon, polycrystalline silicon, microcrystal (also referred to as microcrystal or semi-amorphous) silicon, or the like can be used.

As the transistor structure, a top gate type, a bottom gate type, or the like can be used. As the bottom gate type transistor, a channel etch type, a channel protection type, or the like can be used.

FIG. 31 shows an example of a top view of pixels when the TN method and the transistor are combined.

The pixels shown in FIG. 31 are the first transistor 2304, the second transistor 2305, and the third transistor.
The transistor 2306, the first liquid crystal capacity, the second liquid crystal capacity, the first holding capacity and the second holding capacity are connected to the scanning line 2301, the signal line 2302 and the Cs line 2311. .. Since the equivalent circuit diagram of the pixel configuration shown in FIG. 31 is the same as that in FIG. 6, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 31, the pixel electrode constituting the first liquid crystal capacity corresponds to the pixel electrode 2307, and the pixel electrode constituting the second liquid crystal capacity corresponds to the pixel electrode 2308. The first holding capacitance is composed of a capacitance line 2312 connected to the Cs wire 2311 outside the pixel portion, a semiconductor layer 2309 connected to the pixel electrode 2307, and an insulating film provided between them. ing. Similarly to the first holding capacity, the second holding capacity is also composed of a capacitance line 2312, a semiconductor layer 2310 connected to the pixel electrode 2308, and an insulating film provided between them. The capacitance line 2312 constituting the first holding capacitance and the second holding capacitance is a transistor 2304.
Scanning line 2301 and Cs line 2301 including gate electrodes constituting ~ 2306, and semiconductor layer 2
309 and 2310 are manufactured in the same process as the semiconductor layer including the source region, drain region and channel forming region constituting the transistors 2304 to 2306. Further, in the insulating film constituting the first holding capacity and the second holding capacity, the transistors 2304 to 2306 are also used.
A film produced in the same process as the gate insulating film constituting the above can be used.

As shown in FIG. 31, it is possible to obtain a liquid crystal display device having excellent viewing angle characteristics by utilizing two liquid crystal capacities having different orientation states. The top view shown in FIG. 31 is an example, and is not limited thereto.

In each transistor, the channel width can be increased by forming a structure in which one of the source electrode and the drain electrode surrounds the other electrode. Such a structure is particularly effective when an amorphous semiconductor layer having a mobility lower than that of the crystalline semiconductor layer is used for the semiconductor layer of the transistor constituting the pixel.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied and combined with the content (which may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and the embodiment. , Or can be replaced freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment and the example with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments and examples are used.
An example when it is embodied, an example when it is slightly deformed, an example when it is partially changed, an example when it is improved, an example when it is described in detail, an example when it is applied, and an example about related parts. And so on. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments and examples can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiment.

(Embodiment 7)
In the present embodiment, various liquid crystal modes will be described with reference to cross-sectional views.

32 (A) and 32 (B) show schematic cross sections of TN mode.

The liquid crystal layer 3300 is sandwiched between the first substrate 3301 and the second substrate 3302 arranged so as to face each other. A first electrode 3305 is formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 3301. A second electrode 3306 is formed on the upper surface of the second substrate 3302. A first polarizing plate 3303 is arranged on the opposite side of the first substrate 3301 from the liquid crystal layer. Second
A second polarizing plate 3304 is arranged on the opposite side of the substrate 3302 from the liquid crystal layer. In addition, it should be noted.
The first polarizing plate 3303 and the second polarizing plate 3304 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol.

The first polarizing plate 3303 may be arranged on the upper surface of the first substrate 3301. The second polarizing plate 3304 may be arranged on the upper surface of the second substrate 3302.

Of the first electrode 3305 and the second electrode 3306, at least one (or both) of the electrodes may have translucency (transmissive type or reflective type). Alternatively, both electrodes may be translucent and a part of one electrode may be reflective (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 32A is a schematic cross-sectional view when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3305 and the second electrode 3306 (referred to as a longitudinal electric field method). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Then, the first polarizing plate 3303
And the second polarizing plate 3304 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, so that the light from the backlight cannot pass through the substrate. Therefore, the black display is performed.

FIG. 32B is a schematic cross-sectional view when no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3305 and the second electrode 3306. Liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side, and the first electrode 3305 to the second electrode 3
Since the light is rotated toward 306, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3303 and the second polarizing plate 3304 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed. This is the so-called normally white mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3305 and the second electrode 3306, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

The liquid crystal display device having the configurations shown in FIGS. 32 (A) and 32 (B) can perform full-color display by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 3301 side or the second substrate 3302 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the TN mode, a known one may be used.

33 (A) and 33 (B) show a schematic view of a cross section of the VA mode. The VA mode is a mode in which the liquid crystal molecules are oriented so as to be perpendicular to the substrate when there is no electric field.

The liquid crystal layer 3400 is sandwiched between the first substrate 3401 and the second substrate 3402 arranged so as to face each other. A first electrode 3405 is formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 3401. A second electrode 3406 is formed on the upper surface of the second substrate 3402. A first polarizing plate 3403 is arranged on the opposite side of the first substrate 3401 from the liquid crystal layer. Second
A second polarizing plate 3404 is arranged on the opposite side of the substrate 3402 from the liquid crystal layer. In addition, it should be noted.
The first polarizing plate 3403 and the second polarizing plate 3404 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol.

The first polarizing plate 3403 may be arranged on the upper surface of the first substrate 3401. The second polarizing plate 3404 may be arranged on the upper surface of the second substrate 3402.

Of the first electrode 3405 and the second electrode 3406, at least one (or both) electrodes may have translucency (transmissive type or reflective type). Alternatively, both electrodes may be translucent and a part of one electrode may be reflective (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 33A is a schematic cross-sectional view when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3405 and the second electrode 3406 (referred to as a longitudinal electric field method). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3403 and the second polarizing plate 3404 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

FIG. 33B is a schematic cross-sectional view when no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3405 and the second electrode 3406. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3403 and the second polarizing plate 3404 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, the black display is performed. This is the so-called normally black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3405 and the second electrode 3406, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

The liquid crystal display device having the configurations shown in FIGS. 34 (A) and 34 (B) can perform full-color display by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 3401 side or the second substrate 3402 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the VA mode, a known one may be used.

33 (C) and 33 (D) show a schematic view of a cross section of the MVA mode. The MVA mode is a method of compensating each other for the viewing angle dependence of each part.

The liquid crystal layer 3410 is sandwiched between the first substrate 3411 and the second substrate 3412 arranged so as to face each other. A first electrode 3415 is formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 3411. A second electrode 3416 is formed on the upper surface of the second substrate 3412. A first protrusion 3417 is formed on the first electrode 3415 for orientation control. A second protrusion 3418 is formed on the second electrode 3416 for orientation control. A first polarizing plate 3413 is arranged on the opposite side of the first substrate 3411 from the liquid crystal layer. Second substrate 3
A second polarizing plate 3414 is arranged on the side opposite to the liquid crystal layer of 412. The first polarizing plate 3413 and the second polarizing plate 3414 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol.

The first polarizing plate 3413 may be arranged on the upper surface of the first substrate 3411. The second polarizing plate 3414 may be arranged on the upper surface of the second substrate 3412.

Of the first electrode 3415 and the second electrode 3416, at least one (or both) of the electrodes may have translucency (transmissive type or reflective type). Alternatively, both electrodes may be translucent and a part of one electrode may be reflective (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 33C is a schematic cross-sectional view when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3415 and the second electrode 3416 (referred to as a longitudinal electric field method). The light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3413 and the second polarizing plate 3414 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed. Further, the liquid crystal molecules are the first protrusion 3417 and the second protrusion 341.
Affected by 8, the first protrusion 3417 and the second protrusion 3418 fall and line up. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the viewing angle.

FIG. 33 (D) is a schematic cross-sectional view when no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3415 and the second electrode 3416. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3413 and the second polarizing plate 3414 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, the black display is performed. This is the so-called normally black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3415 and the second electrode 3416, it is possible to control the state, that is, the orientation of the liquid crystal molecules. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

The liquid crystal display device having the configurations shown in FIGS. 36 (C) and 36 (D) can perform full-color display by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 3411 side or the second substrate 3412 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the MVA mode, a known one may be used.

34 (A) and 34 (B) show a schematic view of the cross section of the OCB mode. In the OCB mode, the arrangement of the liquid crystal molecules in the liquid crystal layer optically forms a compensating state, so that the viewing angle dependence is small. This state of the liquid crystal molecule is called bend orientation.

The liquid crystal layer 3500 is sandwiched between the first substrate 3501 and the second substrate 3502 arranged so as to face each other. A first electrode 3505 is formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 3501. A second electrode 3506 is formed on the upper surface of the second substrate 3502. A first polarizing plate 3503 is arranged on the opposite side of the first substrate 3501 from the liquid crystal layer. Second
A second polarizing plate 336 is arranged on the opposite side of the substrate 3502 from the liquid crystal layer. The first polarizing plate 3503 and the second polarizing plate 336 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol.

The first polarizing plate 3503 may be arranged on the upper surface of the first substrate 3501. The second polarizing plate 336 may be arranged on the upper surface of the second substrate 3502.

Of the first electrode 3505 and the second electrode 3506, at least one (or both) electrodes may have translucency (transmissive type or reflective type). Alternatively, both electrodes may be translucent and a part of one electrode may be reflective (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 34 (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3505 and the second electrode 3506 (referred to as a longitudinal electric field method). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the first polarizing plate 3503
And the second polarizing plate 336 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, so that the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, the black display is performed.

FIG. 34 (B) is a schematic cross-sectional view when no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3505 and the second electrode 3506. Since the liquid crystal molecules are in a bend-oriented state, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3503 and the second polarizing plate 336 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed. This is the so-called normally white mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3505 and the second electrode 3506, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

The liquid crystal display device having the configurations shown in FIGS. 34 (A) and 34 (B) can perform full-color display by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 3501 side or the second substrate 3502 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the OCB mode, a known one may be used.

34 (C) and 34 (D) show schematic cross sections of FLC mode or AFLC mode.

The liquid crystal layer 3510 is sandwiched between the first substrate 3511 and the second substrate 3512 arranged so as to face each other. A first electrode 3515 is formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 3511. A second electrode 3516 is formed on the upper surface of the second substrate 3512. A first polarizing plate 3513 is arranged on the opposite side of the first substrate 3511 from the liquid crystal layer. Second
A second polarizing plate 3514 is arranged on the opposite side of the substrate 3512 from the liquid crystal layer. In addition, it should be noted.
The first polarizing plate 3513 and the second polarizing plate 3514 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol.

The first polarizing plate 3513 may be arranged on the upper surface of the first substrate 3511. The second polarizing plate 3514 may be arranged on the upper surface of the second substrate 3512.

Of the first electrode 3515 and the second electrode 3516, at least one (or both) of the electrodes may have translucency (transmissive type or reflective type). Alternatively, both electrodes may be translucent and a part of one electrode may be reflective (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 34C is a schematic cross-sectional view when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3515 and the second electrode 3516 (referred to as a longitudinal electric field method). Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side in a direction deviated from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3513 and the second polarizing plate 3514 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

FIG. 34 (D) is a schematic cross-sectional view when no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3515 and the second electrode 3516. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the first polarizing plate 3
Since the 513 and the second polarizing plate 3514 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, the black display is performed. This is the so-called normally black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3515 and the second electrode 3516, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

The liquid crystal display device having the configurations shown in FIGS. 34 (C) and 34 (D) can perform full-color display by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 3511 side or the second substrate 3512 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the FLC mode or the AFLC mode, a known liquid crystal material may be used.

35 (A) and 35 (B) show a schematic view of a cross section of the IPS mode. The IPS mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to a substrate, and an electrode adopts a transverse electric field method provided only on one substrate side.

The liquid crystal layer 3600 is sandwiched between the first substrate 3601 and the second substrate 3602 arranged so as to face each other. A first electrode 3605 and a second electrode 3606 are formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 3601. A first polarizing plate 3603 is arranged on the opposite side of the first substrate 3601 from the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 3604 is arranged on the side opposite to the liquid crystal layer of the second substrate 3602. The first polarizing plate 3603 and the second polarizing plate 3604 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol.

The first polarizing plate 3603 may be arranged on the upper surface of the first substrate 3601. The second polarizing plate 3604 may be arranged on the upper surface of the second substrate 3602.

Of the first electrode 3605 and the second electrode 3606, at least one (or both) electrodes may have translucency (transmissive type or reflective type). Alternatively, both electrodes may be translucent and a part of one electrode may be reflective (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 35 (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3605 and the second electrode 3606. Since the liquid crystal molecules are oriented along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3603 and the second polarizing plate 3604 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

FIG. 35B is a schematic cross-sectional view when no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3605 and the second electrode 3606. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the first polarizing plate 3
Since the 603 and the second polarizing plate 3604 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, the black display is performed. This is the so-called normally black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3605 and the second electrode 3606, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

The liquid crystal display device having the configurations shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B) can perform full-color display by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 3601 side or the second substrate 3602 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the IPS mode, a known one may be used.

35 (C) and 35 (D) show a schematic view of a cross section of the FFS mode. The FFS mode is also a mode in which the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrodes adopt a transverse electric field method provided only on one substrate side.

The liquid crystal layer 3610 is sandwiched between the first substrate 3611 and the second substrate 3612 arranged so as to face each other. A second electrode 3616 is formed on the upper surface of the first substrate 3611. An insulating film 3617 is formed on the upper surface of the second electrode 3616. A second electrode 3616 is formed on the insulating film 3617. A first polarizing plate 3613 is arranged on the opposite side of the first substrate 3611 from the liquid crystal layer. A second polarizing plate 3614 is arranged on the side of the second substrate 3612 opposite to the liquid crystal layer. The first polarizing plate 3613 and the second polarizing plate 3613
The polarizing plate 3614 of the above is arranged so as to form a cross Nicol.

The first polarizing plate 3613 may be arranged on the upper surface of the first substrate 3611. The second polarizing plate 3614 may be arranged on the upper surface of the second substrate 3612.

Of the first electrode 3615 and the second electrode 3616, at least one (or both) electrodes may have translucency (transmissive type or reflective type). Alternatively, both electrodes may be translucent and a part of one electrode may be reflective (semi-transmissive type).

FIG. 35C is a schematic cross-sectional view when a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3615 and the second electrode 3616. Since the liquid crystal molecules are oriented along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. Since the first polarizing plate 3613 and the second polarizing plate 3614 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate. Therefore, white display is performed.

FIG. 35 (D) is a schematic cross-sectional view when no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3615 and the second electrode 3616. Since the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction, the light from the backlight is not affected by the birefringence of the liquid crystal molecules. And the first polarizing plate 3
Since the 613 and the second polarizing plate 3614 are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate. Therefore, the black display is performed. This is the so-called normally black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3615 and the second electrode 3616, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

The liquid crystal display device having the configurations shown in FIGS. 35 (C) and 35 (D) can perform full-color display by providing a color filter. The color filter can be provided on the first substrate 3611 side or the second substrate 3612 side.

As the liquid crystal material used in the FFS mode, a known one may be used.

Next, various liquid crystal modes will be described with reference to the top view.

FIG. 36 shows a top view of one of a plurality of liquid crystal capacities possessed by a pixel to which the MVA mode is applied.

FIG. 36 shows the first electrode 3701 and the second electrode (3702a, 3702b, 3702c).
And the protrusion 3703 are shown. The first electrode 3701 is formed on the entire surface of the facing substrate. The second electrodes (3702a, 3702b, 3702c) so that the shape is doglegged.
) Is formed. The second electrode (3702a, 3702b, 3702c) is placed on the first electrode 3701 so that the shape corresponds to the second electrode (3702a, 3702b, 3702c).
) Is formed.

The openings of the second electrodes (3702a, 3702b, 3702c) function like protrusions.

When a voltage is applied to the first electrode 3701 and the second electrode (3702a, 3702b, 3702c) (referred to as a longitudinal electric field method), the liquid crystal molecules are transferred to the second electrode (3702a, 3702b,).
3702c) is in a state of being tilted and lined up with respect to the opening and the protrusion 3703. Therefore, it is possible to improve the viewing angle. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate, so that the white display is performed.

When no voltage is applied to the first electrode 3701 and the second electrode (3702a, 3702b, 3702c), the liquid crystal molecules are arranged vertically. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the panel.
It is displayed in black. This is the so-called normally black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode 3701 and the second electrode (3702a, 3702b, 3702c), the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation can be controlled.
Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

As the liquid crystal material used in the MVA mode, a known one may be used.

37 (A), (B), (C), and (D) show a top view of one liquid crystal capacity to which the IPS mode is applied. The IPS mode is a mode in which liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to a substrate, and an electrode adopts a transverse electric field method provided only on one substrate side.

In the IPS mode, the pair of electrodes are formed to have different shapes.

FIG. 37 (A) shows the first electrode 3801 and the second electrode 3802. The first electrode 3801 and the second electrode 3802 have a wavy shape.

FIG. 37B shows the first electrode 3811 and the second electrode 3812. The first electrode 3811 and the second electrode 3812 have a shape having concentric openings.

FIG. 37C shows the first electrode 3831 and the second electrode 3832. The first electrode 3831 and the second electrode 3832 have a comb-like shape and a partially overlapping shape.

FIG. 37 (D) shows the first electrode 3841 and the second electrode 3842. The first electrode 3841 and the second electrode 3842 have a comb-like shape and are shaped so that the electrodes mesh with each other.

The first electrode (3801, 3811, 3821, 3831) and the second electrode (3802, 3)
When a voltage is applied to 812, 3822, 3832), the liquid crystal molecules are in a state of being oriented along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate, so that a white display is performed.

The first electrode (3801, 3811, 3821, 3831) and the second electrode (3802, 3)
When no voltage is applied to 812, 3822, 3832), the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate, so that a black display is performed. This is the so-called normal black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode and the second electrode, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

As the liquid crystal material used in the IPS mode, a known one may be used.

38 (A), (B), (C), and (D) are top views of one liquid crystal capacity to which the FFS mode is applied. The FFS mode is a mode in which the liquid crystal molecules are always rotated in a plane with respect to the substrate, and the electrodes adopt a transverse electric field method provided only on one substrate side.

In the FFS mode, the first electrode is formed on the upper surface of the second electrode so as to have various shapes.

FIG. 38 (A) shows the first electrode 3901 and the second electrode 3902. The first electrode 3901 has a bent dogleg shape. The second electrode 3902 may not be patterned.

FIG. 38B shows the first electrode 3911 and the second electrode 3912. The first electrode 3911 has a concentric shape. The second electrode 3912 does not have to be patterned.

FIG. 38C shows the first electrode 3931 and the second electrode 3932. The first electrode 3931 has a comb-like shape and is shaped so that the electrodes mesh with each other. The second electrode 3932 does not have to be patterned.

FIG. 38 (D) shows the first electrode 3941 and the second electrode 3942. The first electrode 3941 has a comb-like shape. The second electrode 3942 may not be patterned.

The first electrode (3901, 3911, 3921, 3931) and the second electrode (3902, 3)
When a voltage is applied to 912, 3922, 3932), the liquid crystal molecules are in a state of being oriented along the lines of electric force deviated from the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight passes through the substrate, so that a white display is performed.

The first electrode (3901, 3911, 3921, 3931) and the second electrode (3902, 3)
When no voltage is applied to 912, 3922, 3932), the liquid crystal molecules are arranged side by side along the rubbing direction. When the pair of polarizing plates are arranged so as to form a cross Nicol, the light from the backlight does not pass through the substrate, so that a black display is performed. This is the so-called normal black mode.

By controlling the voltage applied to the first electrode and the second electrode, it is possible to control the state of the liquid crystal molecules, that is, the orientation. Therefore, since the light from the backlight can be controlled by the liquid crystal molecules, it is possible to display a predetermined image.

As the liquid crystal material used in the IPS mode, a known one may be used.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied and combined with the content (which may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and the embodiment. , Or can be replaced freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment and the example with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments and examples are used.
An example when it is embodied, an example when it is slightly deformed, an example when it is partially changed, an example when it is improved, an example when it is described in detail, an example when it is applied, and an example about related parts. And so on. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments and examples can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiment.

(Embodiment 8)
In the present embodiment, the peripheral portion of the liquid crystal panel will be described.

FIG. 39 shows a backlight unit 2601 called an edge light type and a liquid crystal panel 26.
An example of a liquid crystal display device having 07 is shown. The edge light type is a method in which a light source is arranged at the end of the backlight unit and the light emitted from the light source is radiated from the entire light emitting surface. The edge light type backlight unit is thin and can save power.

The backlight unit 2601 includes a diffuser plate 2602, a light guide plate 2603, and a reflector plate 2604.
It is composed of a lamp reflector 2605 and a light source 2606.

The light source 2606 has a function of emitting light as needed. For example, as the light source 2606, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 2605 has a function of efficiently guiding light emitted from the light source 2606 to the light guide plate 2603. The light guide plate 2603 has a function of totally reflecting the light from the light source 2603 and guiding the light over the entire surface. The diffuser plate 2602 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness. The reflector 2604 is
It has a function of reflecting light leaking from the light guide plate 2603 in the opposite direction from the liquid crystal panel 2603 and reusing it.

A control circuit for adjusting the brightness of the light source 2606 is connected to the backlight unit 2601. The brightness of the light source 2606 can be adjusted by this control circuit.

40 (A), (B), (C) and (D) are diagrams showing a detailed configuration of an edge light type backlight unit. The description of the diffuser plate, the light guide plate, the reflector, and the like will be omitted.

The backlight unit 2701 shown in FIG. 40 (A) has a configuration in which a cold cathode tube 2703 is used as a light source. A lamp reflector 2702 is provided in order to efficiently reflect the light from the cold cathode tube 2703. Such a configuration is often used for large display devices.

The backlight unit 2711 shown in FIG. 40 (B) has a light emitting diode (LE) as a light source.
D) It is a configuration using 2713. For example, a light emitting diode (W) 2713 that emits white light.
Are arranged at predetermined intervals. A lamp reflector 2712 is provided in order to efficiently reflect the light from the light emitting diode 2713.

Since the light emitting intensity of the light emitting diode is strong, the configuration using the light emitting diode is suitable for a large display device. Further, since the light emitting diode has excellent color reproducibility, it is possible to display an image faithful to the input image information. Moreover, since the light emitting diode is small, the arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, the frame of the display device can be narrowed.

When the light emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light emitting diode can be arranged on the back surface of the substrate. The light emitting diodes maintain a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order.

The backlight unit 2721 shown in FIG. 40 (C) has a light emitting diode (LED) 2723, a light emitting diode (LED) 2724, and a light emitting diode (LE) of each color of RGB as a light source.
D) It is a configuration using 2725. The light emitting diode 2723 (LED), the light emitting diode (LED) 2724, and the light emitting diode (LED) 2725 of each color of RGB are arranged at predetermined intervals. Color reproducibility can be improved by using light emitting diodes (LEDs) 2723, light emitting diodes (LEDs) 2724, and light emitting diodes (LEDs) 2725 for each color of RGB. Further, a lamp reflector 2722 is provided in order to efficiently reflect the light from the light emitting diode.

Since the brightness of the light emitting diode is high, a configuration using a light emitting diode of each color of RGB as a light source is suitable for a large display device. Further, since the light emitting diode has excellent color reproducibility, it is possible to display an image faithful to the input image information. Moreover, since the light emitting diode is small, the arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, the frame of the display device can be narrowed.

Color display can be performed by sequentially turning on the RGB light emitting diodes according to the time. It can be displayed in the so-called field sequential mode.

A light emitting diode that emits white light and a light emitting diode (LED) 2723 for each color of RGB.
, Light emitting diode (LED) 2724, and light emitting diode (LED) 2725 can be combined.

When the light emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light emitting diode can be arranged on the back surface of the substrate. Further, each of the light emitting diodes maintains a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. With such an arrangement, color reproducibility can be improved.

The backlight unit 2731 shown in FIG. 40 (D) has a light emitting diode (LED) 2733, a light emitting diode (LED) 2734, and a light emitting diode (LE) of each color of RGB as a light source.
D) It is a configuration using 2735. For example, light emitting diodes (LEDs) 27 for each color of RGB
33, a light emitting diode (LED) 2734, a light emitting diode of a color (for example, green) having a low light emitting intensity among the light emitting diodes (LED) 2735, and a plurality of light emitting diodes (LED) 2734 are arranged in FIG. 40 (D). With such a configuration, the color reproducibility can be further improved. Further, a lamp reflector 2732 is provided in order to efficiently reflect the light from the light emitting diode.

Since the light emitting diode has a high light emitting intensity, a configuration using a light emitting diode of each color of RGB as a light source is suitable for a large display device. Further, since the light emitting diode has excellent color reproducibility, it is possible to display an image faithful to the input image information. Moreover, since the light emitting diode is small, the arrangement area can be reduced. Therefore, the frame of the display device can be narrowed.

Color display can be performed by sequentially turning on the RGB light emitting diodes according to the time.

In addition, a light emitting diode that emits white and a light emitting diode (LED) 2733 of each color of RGB
, Light emitting diode (LED) 2734, and light emitting diode (LED) 2735 can be combined.

When the light emitting diode is mounted on a large display device, the light emitting diode can be arranged on the back surface of the substrate. Each of the light emitting diodes maintains a predetermined interval, and the light emitting diodes of each color are arranged in order. With such an arrangement, color reproducibility can be improved.

FIG. 41 (A) shows a backlight unit 2800 called a direct type and a liquid crystal panel 280.
An example of a liquid crystal display device having 5 is shown. The direct type is a method in which a light source is arranged directly under the light emitting surface, and the light emitted from the light source is radiated from the entire light emitting surface. The direct type backlight unit can efficiently use the amount of emitted light.

The backlight unit 2800 is composed of a diffuser plate 2801, a light shielding plate 2802, a lamp reflector 2803, and a light source 2804.

The light source 2804 has a function of emitting light as needed. For example, as the light source 2805, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 2803 efficiently emits light from the light source 2804, and the diffuser plate 2801 and the light-shielding plate 2
It has a function to lead to 802. The light-shielding plate 2802 has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness by increasing the amount of light-shielding in a place where the light is stronger according to the arrangement of the light source 2804. Diffusion plate 2801
Further has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness.

A control circuit for adjusting the brightness of the light source 2804 is connected to the backlight unit 2800. The brightness of the light source 2804 can be adjusted by this control circuit.

FIG. 41 (B) shows a backlight unit 3015 called a direct type and a liquid crystal panel 301.
An example of a liquid crystal display device having 0 is shown.

The backlight unit 2810 includes a diffuser plate 2811, a light-shielding plate 2812, a lamp reflector 2813, a light source (R) 2814a for each color of RGB, a light source (G) 2814b, and a light source (B) 2.
It is composed of 814c.

The light source 2814a (R), the light source 2814b (G), and the light source 2814c (B) of each of the RGB colors have a function of emitting light as needed. For example, light source 2814a (R), light source 2814b
As the (G) and the light source 2814c (B), a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, a light emitting diode, an inorganic EL, an organic EL, or the like is used. The lamp reflector 2813 has a function of efficiently guiding the light emission of the light source 2814 to the diffuser plate 2811 and the light-shielding plate 2812. The shading plate 2812
It has a function of reducing unevenness in brightness by increasing the amount of light blocking in places where the light is stronger according to the arrangement of the light source 2814. The diffuser plate 2811 has a function of further reducing unevenness in brightness.

The backlight unit 2810 includes a light source 2814a (R) of each RGB color and a light source 2.
A control circuit for adjusting the brightness of the 814b (G) and the light source 2814c (B) is connected. By this control circuit, the light source 2814a (R) and the light source 2814b (G) of each color of RGB
) And the brightness of the light source 2814c (B) can be adjusted.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a polarizing plate (also referred to as a polarizing film).

The polarizing film 2900 has a protective film 2901, a substrate film 2902, a PVA polarizing film 2903, a substrate film 2904, an adhesive layer 2905 and a release film 2906.

The PVA polarizing film 2903 has a function of converting light into light (linearly polarized light) only in a certain vibration direction. Specifically, the PVA polarizing film 2903 contains molecules (polarizers) whose electron densities differ greatly between the vertical and horizontal directions. The PVA polarizing film 2903 in which the directions of the molecules whose electron densities are significantly different in the vertical and horizontal directions are aligned makes it possible to obtain linearly polarized light.

As an example, the PVA polarizing film 2903 is made of polyvinyl alcohol (Poly Vin).
By doping a polymer film of yl Alcohol) with an iodine compound and pulling the PVA film in a certain direction, a film in which iodine molecules are arranged in a certain direction can be obtained. Then, the light parallel to the long axis of the iodine molecule is absorbed by the iodine molecule. A dichroic dye may be used instead of iodine for high durability and high heat resistance. The dye is
It is suitable for liquid crystal display devices that require durability and heat resistance, such as in-vehicle LCDs or projector LCDs.

Further, the PVA polarizing film 2903 is a film (board film 290) whose base materials are both sides.
2 and the substrate film 2904) can be sandwiched between the two and the substrate film 2904) to increase the reliability. Also, PVA
The polarizing film 2903 may be sandwiched between highly transparent and highly durable triacetylrose (TAC) films. Such a substrate film and a TAC film are P.
It functions as a protective layer for the polarizer of the VA polarizing film 2903.

An adhesive layer 2905 for sticking to the glass substrate of the liquid crystal panel is stuck on the substrate film (board film 2904). The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2905 is formed by applying a pressure-sensitive adhesive to a substrate film (board film 2904) on one side. The pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 2905 is provided with a release film 2906 (separate film).

The other substrate film (substrate film 2902) is provided with a protective film 2901.

A hard coat scattering layer (anti-glare layer) may be provided on the surface of the polarizing film 2900. Since the hard coat scattering layer has fine irregularities formed on its surface by the AG treatment and has an antiglare function of scattering external light, it is possible to prevent reflection of external light on the liquid crystal panel. Therefore, surface reflection can be prevented.

Further, a plurality of optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes may be multilayered (also referred to as anti-reflection treatment or AR treatment) on the surface of the polarizing film 2900. The multi-layered optical thin film layers having different refractive indexes can reduce the surface reflectance due to the interference effect of light.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a system block of a liquid crystal display device.

As shown in FIG. 43 (A), the signal line 3012 is a signal line drive circuit 300 in the pixel unit 3005.
It is arranged so as to extend from 3. Further, the scanning line 3010 is arranged so as to extend from the scanning line driving circuit 3004. Then, a plurality of pixels are arranged in a matrix in the intersection region of the signal line 3012 and the scanning line 3010. Since each of the plurality of pixels has a switching element and the details of the pixel unit 3005 have been described in the above-described embodiment, they will be omitted here.

In FIG. 43A, the drive circuit unit 3008 includes a control circuit 3002 and a signal line drive circuit 30.
It has 03 and a scanning line drive circuit 3004. A video signal 3001 is input to the control circuit 3002. The control circuit 3002 is a signal line drive circuit 30 in response to the control signal 3001.
03 and the scanning line drive circuit 3004 are controlled. Therefore, the control circuit 3002 inputs the respective control signals to the signal line drive circuit 3003 and the scanning line drive circuit 3004. Then, in response to this control signal, the signal line drive circuit 3003 inputs a video signal to the signal line 3012.
The scanning line drive circuit 3004 inputs a scanning signal to the scanning line 3010. Then, the switching element of the pixel is selected according to the scanning signal, and the video signal is input to the pixel electrode of the pixel.

The control circuit 3002 also controls the power supply 3007 in response to the control signal 3001. The power supply 3007 has a means for supplying electric power to the lighting means 3006. Lighting means 30
As 06, an edge light type backlight unit or a direct type backlight unit can be used. Further, a front light may be used for the lighting means 3006. The front light is a plate-shaped light unit that is attached to the front side of the pixel portion and is composed of a light emitting body and a light guide body that illuminate the whole. With such an illumination means, the pixel portion can be evenly illuminated with low power consumption.

The scanning line drive circuit 3004 includes, for example, the shift register 3041 as shown in FIG. 43 (B).
It has a circuit that functions as a level shifter 3042 and a buffer 3043. Signals such as a gate start pulse (GSP) and a gate clock signal (GCK) are input to the shift register 3041 from the control circuit 2902.

As shown in FIG. 43C, the signal line drive circuit 3003 has a circuit that functions as a shift register 3031, a first latch 3032, a second latch 3033, a level shifter 3034, and a buffer 3035. The circuit that functions as the buffer 3035 is a circuit that has a function of amplifying a weak signal, and has an operational amplifier and the like. Signals such as a start pulse (SSP) and a source clock signal (SCK) are transmitted to the level shifter 3034 in the first latch 303.
Data (DATA) such as a video signal is input to 2. A latch (LAT) signal can be temporarily held in the second latch 3033, and the latch (LAT) signal is input to the pixel unit 3005 all at once. This is called line sequential drive. Therefore, if it is a pixel that performs point-sequential drive instead of line-sequential drive,
The second latch can be eliminated.

In the present embodiment, a known liquid crystal panel can be used. For example, as a liquid crystal panel, a configuration in which a liquid crystal layer is sealed between two substrates can be used.
A transistor, a capacitive element, a pixel electrode, an alignment film, or the like is formed on one of the substrates. A polarizing plate, a retardation plate, or a prism sheet may be arranged on the side opposite to the upper surface of the substrate. A color filter, a black matrix, a counter electrode, an alignment film, and the like are formed on the other substrate. A polarizing plate or a retardation plate may be arranged on the side opposite to the upper surface of the other substrate. The color filter and the black matrix may be formed on the upper surface of one of the substrates. By arranging a slit (lattice) on the upper surface side or the opposite side of one of the substrates, three-dimensional display can be performed.

The polarizing plate, the retardation plate, and the prism sheet can be arranged between the two substrates. Alternatively, it can be integrated with any of the two substrates.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied and combined with the content (which may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and the embodiment. , Or can be replaced freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment and the example with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments and examples are used.
An example when it is embodied, an example when it is slightly deformed, an example when it is partially changed, an example when it is improved, an example when it is described in detail, an example when it is applied, and an example about related parts. And so on. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments and examples can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiment.

(Embodiment 9)
In this embodiment, a method of driving the display device will be described. In particular, a method of driving the liquid crystal display device will be described.

The liquid crystal panel that can be used in the liquid crystal display device described in the present embodiment has a structure in which a liquid crystal material is sandwiched between two substrates. Each of the two substrates is provided with electrodes for controlling the electric field applied to the liquid crystal material. A liquid crystal material is a material whose optical and electrical properties change depending on an electric field applied from the outside. Therefore, the liquid crystal panel
It is a device capable of obtaining desired optical and electrical properties by controlling the voltage applied to the liquid crystal material using the electrodes of the substrate. Then, by arranging a large number of electrodes in a plane, each of them becomes a pixel, and by individually controlling the voltage applied to the pixel, a liquid crystal panel capable of displaying a fine image can be obtained.

Here, the response time of the liquid crystal material to the change of the electric field is the distance between the two substrates (cell gap).
Although it depends on the type of liquid crystal material and the like, it is generally several milliseconds to several tens of milliseconds. Further, when the amount of change in the electric field is small, the response time of the liquid crystal material becomes even longer. This property causes problems in image display such as afterimage, tailing, and decrease in contrast when displaying a moving image by the liquid crystal panel, especially when changing from one halftone to another halftone (change in electric field). Is small), the degree of the above-mentioned obstacle becomes remarkable.

On the other hand, as a problem peculiar to the liquid crystal panel using the active matrix, there is a change in the write voltage due to constant charge drive. The constant charge drive in this embodiment will be described below.

The pixel circuit in the active matrix includes a switch that controls writing and a capacitive element that holds the charge. The method of driving the pixel circuit in the active matrix is that after the switch is turned on and a predetermined voltage is written to the pixel circuit, the switch is immediately turned off to hold the electric charge in the pixel circuit (hold state). In the hold state, no charge is exchanged between the inside and outside of the pixel circuit (constant charge). Normally, the period in which the switch is off is several hundred times (the number of scanning lines) longer than the period in which the switch is in the on state. Therefore, it can be considered that the switch of the pixel circuit is almost in the off state.
From the above, it is assumed that the constant charge drive in the present embodiment is a drive method in which the pixel circuit is in a hold state for most of the period when the liquid crystal panel is driven.

Next, the electrical properties of the liquid crystal material will be described. When the electric field applied from the outside changes, the optical properties of the liquid crystal material change, and at the same time, the dielectric constant also changes. That is, when each pixel of the liquid crystal panel is considered as a capacitive element (liquid crystal element) sandwiched between two electrodes, the capacitive element is a capacitive element whose capacitance changes depending on the applied voltage. This phenomenon is called dynamic capacitance.

As described above, when the capacitive element whose capacitance changes depending on the applied voltage is driven by the above-mentioned constant charge drive, the following problems occur. That is, there is a problem that if the capacitance of the liquid crystal element changes in the hold state in which the charge is not transferred, the applied voltage also changes. This can be understood from the fact that the amount of charge is constant in the relational expression (amount of charge) = (capacitance) × (applied voltage).

For the above reasons, in the liquid crystal panel using the active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to the constant charge drive. As a result, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is different from the change in the driving method that does not take the hold state. FIG. 44 shows this situation. FIG. 44A shows a control example of a voltage written in a pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 44B shows an example of controlling the voltage written in the pixel circuit when the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents voltage. In FIG. 44C, the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents the transmittance of the liquid crystal element.
It shows the time change of the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the voltage represented by FIG. 44A or FIG. 44B is written in the pixel circuit. In FIGS. 44 (A) to 44 (C), the period F represents the voltage rewriting cycle, and the times at which the voltage is rewritten are t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ , ...
・ Explain as.

Here, writing voltage corresponding to image data input to the liquid crystal display device, the rewrite at time 0 _{| V} 1 |, the time _{t 1, t 2, t 3} , t 4, the rewriting in · · · |
It is assumed that V _{2 |.} (See FIG. 44 (A))

The polarity of the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be changed periodically. (Inverted drive: see FIG. 44 (B)) By this method, it is possible to prevent the DC voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent seizure due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element. The period for exchanging the polarities (inversion cycle) may be the same as the voltage rewriting cycle. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of flicker due to the inversion drive. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewriting cycle. In this case, since the inversion cycle is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

Then, the time change of the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the voltage as shown in FIG. 44 (A) or FIG. 44 (B) is applied to the liquid crystal element is shown in FIG. 44 (C). Here, the voltage on the liquid crystal element | V _{1
Let TR 1 be} the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has passed after | is applied. Similarly, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is set to TR ₂ . When the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element _{changes from | V 1} | to | V _{2 | at time t 1} , the transmittance of the liquid crystal element does not _{immediately become TR 2 as shown by the broken line 30401.} It changes slowly. For example, when the voltage rewriting cycle is the same as the frame cycle (16.7 milliseconds) of the 60 Hz image signal, it takes about several frames until _{the transmittance changes to TR 2.}

However, the smooth time change of the transmittance as shown by the broken line 30401 is when the voltage | V ₂ | is accurately applied to the liquid crystal element. In an actual liquid crystal panel, for example, a liquid crystal panel using an active matrix, the voltage in the hold state changes from the voltage in the writing state due to the constant charge drive, so that the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is dashed line 30401. Instead of the time change as shown in the above, the time change is gradual as shown in the solid line 30402. This is because the voltage changes due to the constant charge drive, so that the target voltage cannot be reached by one writing. As a result, the response time of the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is apparently longer than the original response time (broken line 30401), and problems in image display such as afterimage, tailing, and decrease in contrast become remarkable. It will cause it.

By using the overdrive drive, it is possible to simultaneously solve the phenomenon that the original response time of the liquid crystal element and the apparent response time due to the insufficient writing due to the dynamic capacitance and the constant charge drive become longer. This is shown in FIG. 45. FIG. 45A shows a control example of a voltage written in a pixel circuit, with time on the horizontal axis and absolute value of voltage on the vertical axis. FIG. 45B shows an example of controlling the voltage written in the pixel circuit when the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents voltage. In FIG. 45 (C), the horizontal axis represents time and the vertical axis represents the transmittance of the liquid crystal element, and the voltage represented by FIG. 45 (A) or FIG. 45 (B) is written in the pixel circuit. It shows the time change of the transmittance. In FIGS. 45 (A) to 45 (C), the period F represents the voltage rewriting cycle, and the times at which the voltage is rewritten will be described as t ₁ , t ₂ , t ₃ , t ₄ , ....

Here, the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device is | V ₁ | for rewriting at time 0, | V ₃ | for rewriting at time t ₁ , | V 3 |, time t ₂ , t ₃ , t.
_In the rewriting in 4, ..., it is assumed that | V ₂ |. (See FIG. 45 (A))

The polarity of the write voltage corresponding to the image data input to the liquid crystal display device may be changed periodically. (Reversal drive: See FIG. 45B) By this method, it is possible to prevent the DC voltage from being applied to the liquid crystal as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent seizure due to deterioration of the liquid crystal element. The period for exchanging the polarities (inversion cycle) may be the same as the voltage rewriting cycle. In this case, since the inversion cycle is short, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of flicker due to the inversion drive. Further, the inversion cycle may be a cycle that is an integral multiple of the voltage rewriting cycle. In this case, since the inversion cycle is long and the frequency of writing the voltage by changing the polarity can be reduced, the power consumption can be reduced.

Then, the time change of the transmittance of the liquid crystal element when the voltage as shown in FIG. 45 (A) or FIG. 45 (B) is applied to the liquid crystal element is shown in FIG. 45 (C). Here, the voltage on the liquid crystal element | V _{1
Let TR 1 be} the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a sufficient time has passed after | is applied. Similarly, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a voltage | V ₂ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is set to TR ₂ . Similarly, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element after a voltage | V ₃ | is applied to the liquid crystal element and a sufficient time has elapsed is set to TR ₃ . At time t ₁ , the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element changes from | V ₁ | to | V.
_When it changes to 3 |, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element tries to change _{to TR 3} over several frames as shown by the broken line 30501. However, the voltage | _{V 3} | applied at the end at time _{t 2,} later than time _{t 2,} the voltage | _{V 2} | is applied. Therefore, the transmittance of the liquid crystal element is not as shown by the broken line 30501, but as shown by the solid line 30502. here,
At the time of time t _2, the so transmittance is generally a TR _2, the voltage | V 3 _| to set the values preferred. Here, the voltage | V ₃ | is also referred to as an overdrive voltage.

That is, the response time of the liquid crystal element can be controlled to some extent by changing the overdrive voltage | V _{3 |.} This is because the response time of the liquid crystal changes depending on the strength of the electric field. Specifically, the stronger the electric field, the shorter the response time of the liquid crystal element, and the weaker the electric field, the longer the response time of the liquid crystal element.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed according to the amount of change in voltage, that is, the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | _{that give the target transmittances TR 1} and TR _2. .. This is because even if the response time of the liquid crystal element changes depending on the amount of change in voltage, the optimum response time can always be _{obtained by changing the overdrive voltage | V 3 | accordingly.} is there.

The overdrive voltage | V ₃ | is preferably changed depending on the mode of the liquid crystal such as TN, VA, IPS, OCB. This is because even if the response speed of the liquid crystal differs depending on the mode of the liquid crystal, the optimum response time can always be obtained by changing the _{overdrive voltage | V 3 | accordingly.}

The voltage rewriting cycle F may be the same as the frame cycle of the input signal. In this case, since the peripheral drive circuit of the liquid crystal display device can be simplified, a liquid crystal display device having a low manufacturing cost can be obtained.

The voltage rewriting cycle F may be shorter than the frame cycle of the input signal. For example
The voltage rewriting cycle F may be 1/2 times, 1/3 times, or less than the frame period of the input signal. This method is effective in combination with countermeasures for deterioration of video quality due to hold drive of the liquid crystal display device, such as black insertion drive, backlight blinking, backlight scan, and intermediate image insertion drive by motion compensation. is there. That is, since the required response time of the liquid crystal element is short, the countermeasure for the deterioration of the moving image quality due to the hold drive of the liquid crystal display device is relatively easy by using the overdrive drive method described in the present embodiment. The response time of the liquid crystal element can be shortened. Although it is possible to shorten the response time of the liquid crystal element essentially depending on the cell gap, the liquid crystal material, the liquid crystal mode, and the like, it is technically difficult. Therefore, it is very important to use a method such as overdrive that shortens the response time of the liquid crystal element from the driving method.

The voltage rewriting cycle F may be longer than the frame cycle of the input signal. For example
The voltage rewriting cycle F may be twice, three times, or more than the frame period of the input signal. This method is effective when used in combination with a means (circuit) for determining whether or not the voltage is rewritten for a long period of time. That is, when the voltage is not rewritten for a long period of time, the operation of the circuit can be stopped during that period by not performing the voltage rewriting operation itself, so that a liquid crystal display device having low power consumption can be obtained. Can be done.

Next, a specific method for changing the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V _{2 | that give the desired transmittances TR 1} and TR _{2 will be described.}

Since the overdrive circuit is a circuit for appropriately controlling the overdrive voltage | V ₃ | according to the voltages | V ₁ | and | V _{2 | that give the target transmission voltages TR 1} and TR _{2, it is over.} The signal input to the drive circuit is a voltage | V that gives _{a transmission rate TR 1.
The} signal related to 1 | and the signal related to the voltage | V _{2 | that gives the transmittance TR 2} , and the signal output from the overdrive circuit is the signal related to the overdrive voltage | V ₃ |. Here, as these signals, the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element (| V ₁ |, | V ₂ |
, | V ₃ |) may be an analog voltage value, or may be a digital signal for giving a voltage to be applied to the liquid crystal element. Here, the signal related to the overdrive circuit will be described as a digital signal.

First, the overall configuration of the overdrive circuit will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (A). Here, the input image signal 310 is used as a signal for controlling the overdrive voltage.
1a and 3101b are used. As a result of processing these signals, it is assumed that the output image signal 3104 is output as a signal that gives an overdrive voltage.

Here, the voltages | V ₁ | and | V ₂ | that give the desired transmittances TR ₁ and TR _{2 are}
Since the image signals are in frames adjacent to each other, it is preferable that the input image signals 3101a and 3101b are also image signals in frames adjacent to each other. In order to obtain such a signal, the input image signal 3101a can be input to the delay circuit 3102 in FIG. 46A, and the signal output as a result can be the input image signal 3101b. Examples of the delay circuit 3102 include a memory. That is,
In order to delay the input image signal 3101a by one frame, the input image signal 3 is stored in the memory.
The 101a is stored, and at the same time, the signal stored in the previous frame is taken out from the memory as the input image signal 3101b, and the input image signal 3101a and the input image signal 3101b are simultaneously input to the correction circuit 3103. By doing so, it is possible to handle image signals in frames adjacent to each other. Then, by inputting the image signals in the frames adjacent to each other into the correction circuit 3103, the output image signal 3104
Can be obtained. When a memory is used as the delay circuit 3102, a memory having a capacity capable of storing an image signal for one frame (that is, a frame memory) can be used in order to delay by one frame. By doing this, there is no excess or deficiency of memory capacity.
It can have a function as a delay circuit.

Next, the delay circuit 3102 configured mainly for the purpose of reducing the capacity of the memory will be described. By using such a circuit as the delay circuit 3102, the capacity of the memory can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Specifically, as the delay circuit 3102 having such a feature, the one shown in FIG. 46 (B) can be used. The delay circuit 3102 shown in FIG. 46 (B) is the encoder 3
It has 105, a memory 3106, and a decoder 3107.

The operation of the delay circuit 3102 shown in FIG. 46 (B) is as follows. First,
Before storing the input image signal 3101a in the memory 3106, a compression process is performed by the encoder 3105. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the data to be stored in the memory 3106. As a result, the capacity of the memory can be reduced, so that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Then, the compressed image signal is the decoder 3107.
Is sent to, where decompression processing is performed. As a result, the signal before being compressed by the encoder 3105 can be restored. Here, the compression / decompression processing performed by the encoder 3105 and the decoder 3107 may be a reversible process. By doing so, since the image signal is not deteriorated even after the compression / decompression processing is performed, the memory capacity can be reduced without degrading the quality of the image finally displayed on the apparatus. Further, the compression / decompression processing performed by the encoder 3105 and the decoder 3107 may be irreversible processing. By doing so, the size of the compressed image signal data can be made very small, so that the memory capacity can be significantly reduced.

As a method for reducing the memory capacity, various methods other than those listed above can be used. Instead of compressing the image with an encoder, reduce the color information contained in the image signal (for example, reduce the color from 260,000 colors to 65,000 colors), or reduce the number of data (reduce the resolution), etc. The method can be used.

Next, a specific example of the correction circuit 3103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 (C) to (E). The correction circuit 3103 is a circuit for outputting an output image signal of a certain value from two input image signals. Here, when the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is non-linear and it is difficult to obtain them by a simple calculation, a look-up table (LUT) may be used as the correction circuit 3103. Since the relationship between the two input image signals and the output image signal is obtained in advance in the LUT by measurement, the output image signal corresponding to the two input image signals can be obtained only by referring to the LUT. (See (C) of FIG. 46) By using the LUT 3108 as the correction circuit 3103, the correction circuit 3103 can be realized without performing complicated circuit design or the like.

Here, since the LUT is one of the memories, it is preferable to reduce the memory capacity as much as possible in order to reduce the manufacturing cost. As an example of the correction circuit 3103 for realizing this, the circuit shown in FIG. 46 (D) can be considered. The correction circuit 3103 shown in FIG. 46 (D) is
It has a LUT 3109 and an adder 3110. The LUT 3109 has an input image signal 310.
The difference data between 1a and the output image signal 3104 to be output is stored. That is, the corresponding difference data is LUTed from the input image signal 3101a and the input image signal 3101b.
The difference data taken out from the 3109 and the input image signal 3101a are added to the adder 31.
The output image signal 3104 can be obtained by adding by 10. In addition, LUT
By using the data stored in the 3109 as the difference data, the memory capacity of the LUT can be reduced. This is because the data size of the difference data is smaller than that of the output image signal 3104 as it is, so that the memory capacity required for the LUT 3109 can be reduced.

Further, if the output image signal is obtained by a simple operation such as four arithmetic operations of two input image signals, it can be realized by a combination of simple circuits such as an adder, a subtractor, and a multiplier.
As a result, it is not necessary to use the LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced.
Examples of such a circuit include the circuit shown in FIG. 46 (E). Of FIG. 46
The correction circuit 3103 shown in E) includes a subtractor 3111, a multiplier 3112, and an adder 3113.
Have. First, the difference between the input image signal 3101a and the input image signal 3101b is obtained by the subtractor 3111. Then, the multiplier 3112 multiplies the difference by an appropriate coefficient. Then, the difference value obtained by multiplying the input image signal 3101a by an appropriate coefficient is added to the adder 311.
By adding by 3, the output image signal 3104 can be obtained. By using such a circuit, it is not necessary to use the LUT, and the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced.

By using the correction circuit 3103 shown in FIG. 46 (E) under certain conditions,
It is possible to prevent the output of an inappropriate output image signal 3104. The condition is
The difference value between the output image signal 3104 that gives the overdrive voltage and the input image signal 3101a and the input image signal 3101b has linearity. Then, the slope of this linearity is used as a coefficient to be multiplied by the multiplier 3112. That is, it is preferable to use the correction circuit 3103 shown in FIG. 46 (E) for the liquid crystal element having such a property. Examples of the liquid crystal element having such a property include an IPS mode liquid crystal element having a small gradation dependence of the response speed. In this way, for example, by using the correction circuit 3103 shown in FIG. 46 (E) for the liquid crystal element in the IPS mode, the manufacturing cost can be significantly reduced and an inappropriate output image signal 3104 can be output. An overdrive circuit that can be prevented can be obtained.

Note that the same functions as the circuits shown in FIGS. 46A to 46 may be realized by software processing. Regarding the memory used for the delay circuit, other memory of the liquid crystal display device, memory of the device that sends out the image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device (for example, a video card of a personal computer or a similar device), etc. It can be diverted. By doing so, not only the manufacturing cost can be reduced, but also the strength of overdrive and the usage situation can be selected by the user according to his / her preference.

Next, the drive for manipulating the potential of the common line will be described with reference to FIG. 47. Of FIG. 47
A) represents a plurality of pixel circuits when one common line is arranged for one scanning line in a display device using a display element having a capacitive property such as a liquid crystal element. It is a figure. The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 47 (A) includes a transistor 3201, an auxiliary capacitance 3202, a display element 3203, a video signal line 3204, a scanning line 3205, and a common line 3206.

The gate electrode of the transistor 3201 is electrically connected to the scanning line 3205, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 3201 is electrically connected to the video signal line 3204, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 3201. Is an auxiliary capacity 3202
It is electrically connected to one electrode and one electrode of the display element 3203.
Further, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitance 3202 is electrically connected to the common wire 3206.

First, since the transistor 3201 is turned on for the pixel selected by the scanning line 3205, a voltage corresponding to the video signal is applied to the display element 3203 and the auxiliary capacitance 3202 via the video signal line 3204, respectively. At this time, if the video signal causes all the pixels connected to the common line 3206 to display the lowest gradation, or the common line 3
When the highest gradation is displayed for all the pixels connected to the 206, it is not necessary to write the video signal to each pixel via the video signal line 3204. Video signal line 320
Instead of writing the video signal via 4, the voltage applied to the display element 3203 can be changed by moving the potential of the common line 3206.

Next, FIG. 47 (B) shows, in a display device using a display element having a capacitive property such as a liquid crystal element, when two common lines are arranged for one scanning line. It is a figure showing a plurality of pixel circuits. The pixel circuit shown in FIG. 47 (B) includes a transistor 3211, an auxiliary capacitance 3212, a display element 3213, a video signal line 3214, a scanning line 3215, and a first common line 3.
216, a second common line 3217, is provided.

The gate electrode of the transistor 3211 is electrically connected to the scanning line 3215, one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 3211 is electrically connected to the video signal line 3214, and the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 3211. Is an auxiliary capacity 3212
It is electrically connected to one electrode and one electrode of the display element 3213.
Further, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitance 3212 is electrically connected to the first common wire 3216.
Further, in the pixel adjacent to the pixel, the other electrode of the auxiliary capacitance 3212 is electrically connected to the second common wire 3217.

Since the pixel circuit shown in FIG. 47 (B) has few pixels electrically connected to one common line, the first common line 3 is used instead of writing the video signal via the video signal line 3214.
By moving the potential of the 216 or the second common line 3217, the frequency with which the voltage applied to the display element 3213 can be changed becomes significantly higher. In addition, source inversion drive or dot inversion drive becomes possible. By the source inversion drive or the dot inversion drive, flicker can be suppressed while improving the reliability of the element.

Next, the scanning backlight will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66A is a diagram showing a scanning backlight in which cold cathode tubes are juxtaposed. The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 66 (A) includes a diffuser plate 6601 and N cold cathode tubes 6602-1 to 6602-N. By juxtaposing N cold-cathode tubes 6602-1 to 6602-N behind the diffuser plate 6601, the N cold-cathode tubes 6602-1 to 6602-N can be scanned by changing their brightness. Can be done.

The change in the brightness of each cold-cathode tube during scanning will be described with reference to FIG. 66 (C). First, the brightness of the cold cathode tube 6602-1 is changed for a certain period of time. Then, after that, the cold cathode tube 660
The brightness of the cold-cathode tube 6602-2 arranged next to 2-1 is changed by the same time. In this way, the brightness is sequentially changed from the cold cathode tubes 6602-1 to 6602-N. In FIG. 66 (C), the brightness changed for a certain period of time is smaller than the original brightness, but may be larger than the original brightness. Further, although it is assumed that the cold cathode tubes 6602-1 to 6602-N are scanned, the cold cathode tubes 6602-N to 6602-1 may be scanned in the opposite direction.

By driving as shown in FIG. 66, the average brightness of the backlight can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the backlight, which accounts for most of the power consumption of the liquid crystal display device.

An LED may be used as the light source of the scanning backlight. The scanning backlight in that case is as shown in FIG. 66 (B). The scanning backlight shown in FIG. 66 (B) includes a diffuser plate 6611 and light sources 6612-1 to 6612-N in which LEDs are arranged side by side. When an LED is used as the light source of the scanning backlight, there is an advantage that the backlight can be made thinner and lighter. In addition, there is an advantage that the color reproduction range can be widened. Furthermore, L
Since the LEDs juxtaposed to each of the light sources 6612-1 to 6612-N in which the EDs are juxtaposed can be scanned in the same manner, a point scanning type backlight can also be used. If the point scanning type is used, the image quality of moving images can be further improved.

Even when an LED is used as the light source of the backlight, it can be driven by changing the brightness as shown in FIG. 66 (C).

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment may be applied, combined, or replaced with respect to the content (which may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments are improved as an example when they are embodied, an example when they are slightly deformed, and an example when a part is changed. An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of related parts, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiments.

(Embodiment 10)
In the present embodiment, the operation of the display device will be described.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the display device.

The display device includes a pixel unit 6701, a signal line drive circuit 6703, and a scanning line drive circuit 6704. A plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm are arranged in the pixel unit 6701 so as to extend in the row direction from the signal line drive circuit 6703. A plurality of scanning lines G1 to Gn are arranged in the pixel unit 6701 extending in the row direction from the scanning line driving circuit 6704. Pixels 6702 are arranged in a matrix at the intersections of the plurality of signal lines S1 to Sm and the plurality of scanning lines G1 to Gn, respectively.

The signal line drive circuit 6703 has a function of outputting signals to each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. This signal may be called a video signal. The scanning line drive circuit 6704 has a function of outputting a signal to each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm. This signal may be called a scanning signal.

The pixel 6702 has at least a switching element connected to the signal line.
The switching element is controlled to be turned on and off by the potential of the scanning line (scanning signal). Then, the pixel 6702 is selected when the switching element is on, and the pixel 6702 is not selected when the switching element is off.

When pixel 6702 is selected (selected state), a video signal is input to pixel 6702 from the signal line. Then, the state of the pixel 6702 (for example, the brightness, the transmittance, the voltage of the holding capacitance, etc.) changes according to the input video signal.

If pixel 6702 is not selected (non-selected state), no video signal is input to pixel 6702. However, since the pixel 6702 holds the potential corresponding to the video signal input at the time of selection, the pixel 6702 maintains the potential corresponding to the video signal (for example, brightness, transmittance, voltage of holding capacitance, etc.).

The configuration of the display device is not limited to FIG. 67. For example, new wiring (scanning line, signal line, power supply line, capacitance line, common line, etc.) may be added depending on the configuration of the pixel 6702.
As another example, circuits having various functions may be added.

FIG. 68 shows an example of a timing chart for explaining the operation of the display device.

The timing chart of FIG. 68 shows a one-frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen. The period of one frame is not particularly limited, but the viewer of the image flickers (flicker).
It is preferable that the time is at least 1/60 second or less so as not to feel.

In the timing chart of FIG. 68, the scanning line G1 of the first line and the scanning line Gi of the i-th line (scanning line G1) are shown.
1), the timing at which the scanning line Gi + 1 on the i + 1th line and the scanning line Gm on the mth line are selected is shown.

At the same time that the scanning line is selected, the pixel 6702 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the scanning line Gi on the i-th row is selected, the pixel 6702 connected to the scanning line Gi on the i-th row is also selected.

Each of the scanning lines of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is selected in order from the scanning line G1 of the first line to the scanning line Gm of the mth line (hereinafter, also referred to as scanning). For example, during the period when the scanning line Gi on the i-th line is selected, scanning lines (G1 to Gi-1, Gi + 1 to Gm) other than the scanning line Gi on the i-th line are selected.
) Is not selected. Then, in the next period, the scanning line Gi + 1 on the i + 1 line is selected. The period in which one scanning line is selected is referred to as a one-gate selection period.

Therefore, when a scan line in a row is selected, a plurality of pixels 670 connected to the scan line
A video signal is input to 2 from each of the signal lines G1 and Gm. For example, a plurality of pixels 67 connected to the scan line Gi on the i-th line while the scan line Gi on the i-th line is selected.
02 inputs an arbitrary video signal from each of the signal lines S1 to Sn. In this way, the individual plurality of pixels 6702 can be independently controlled by the scanning signal and the video signal.

Next, a case where one gate selection period is divided into a plurality of subgate selection periods will be described.
FIG. 69 shows a timing chart when the one gate selection period is divided into two subgate selection periods (first subgate selection period and second subgate selection period).

It is also possible to divide one gate selection period into three or more subgate selection periods.

The timing chart of FIG. 69 shows a one-frame period corresponding to a period for displaying an image for one screen. The period of one frame is not particularly limited, but the viewer of the image flickers (flicker).
It is preferable that the time is at least 1/60 second or less so as not to feel.

One frame is two subframes (first subframe and second subframe).
It is divided into.

In the timing chart of FIG. 69, the scanning lines Gi on the i-th line and the scanning lines Gi + 1, j on the i + 1th line are shown.
The timing at which the scanning line Gj of the line (any one of the scanning lines Gi + 1 to Gm), the scanning line of the j + 1 line and the scanning line Gj + 1 of the Gj + 1 line are selected is shown.

At the same time that the scanning line is selected, the pixel 6702 connected to the scanning line is also selected. For example, when the scanning line Gi on the i-th row is selected, the pixel 6702 connected to the scanning line Gi on the i-th row is also selected.

Each of the scanning lines G1 to Gm is scanned in order within each subgate selection period. For example, in a certain one-gate selection period, the scan line Gi of the i-th row is selected in the first sub-gate selection period, and the scan line Gj of the j-th row is selected in the second sub-gate selection period.
Then, in the one-gate selection period, it is possible to operate as if two lines of scanning signals were selected at the same time. At this time, separate video signals are input to the signal lines S1 to Sn in the first subgate selection period and the second subgate selection period. Therefore,
Multiple pixels 6702 connected to the i-th row and multiple pixels 670 connected to the j-th row
Separate video signals can be input to 2.

Next, a driving method for converting the frame rate of the input image data (also referred to as the input frame rate) and the display frame rate (also referred to as the display frame rate) will be described. The frame rate is the number of frames per second, and the unit is Hz.

In the present embodiment, the input frame rate does not necessarily have to match the display frame rate. When the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, the frame rate can be converted by a circuit that converts the frame rate of the image data (frame rate conversion circuit). By doing so, even if the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different, it is possible to display at various display frame rates.

When the input frame rate is larger than the display frame rate, it is possible to convert to various display frame rates and display by discarding a part of the input image data.
In this case, since the display frame rate can be reduced, the operating frequency of the drive circuit for display can be reduced, and the power consumption can be reduced. On the other hand, when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, all or part of the input image data is displayed multiple times, another image is generated from the input image data, and what is the input image data? By using means such as generating an irrelevant image, it is possible to convert to various display frame rates and display the image. In this case, the quality of the moving image can be improved by increasing the display frame rate.

In the present embodiment, a frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate will be described in detail. The frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is larger than the display frame rate can be realized by executing the reverse procedure of the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate. it can.

In the present embodiment, an image displayed at the same frame rate as the input frame rate is referred to as a basic image. On the other hand, an image displayed at a frame rate different from that of the basic image and displayed in order to match the input frame rate and the display frame rate is referred to as an interpolated image. As the basic image, the same image as the input image data can be used. The same image as the basic image can be used as the interpolated image. Further, an image different from the basic image can be created, and the created image can be used as an interpolated image.

When creating an interpolated image, a method of detecting a temporal change (image movement) of the input image data and using an image in these intermediate states as an interpolated image, an image obtained by multiplying the brightness of the basic image by a certain coefficient. Is used as an interpolated image, a plurality of different images are created from the input image data, and the plurality of images are presented consecutively in time (one of the plurality of images is used as a basic image, and the image is used as a basic image.
By using the rest as an interpolated image), there is a method of making the observer perceive as if an image corresponding to the input image data is displayed. As a method of creating a plurality of different images from the input image data, there are a method of converting the gamma value of the input image data, a method of dividing the gradation value included in the input image data, and the like.

The image in the intermediate state (intermediate image) is an image obtained by detecting a temporal change (movement of the image) of the input image data and interpolating the detected movement. Obtaining an intermediate image by such a method is called motion compensation.

Next, a specific example of the frame rate conversion method will be described. According to this method, a frame rate conversion of an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times can be realized. Here, n and m are integers of 1 or more. The frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment can be handled separately in the first step and the second step. Here, the first step is a step of converting the frame rate to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times. Here, a basic image may be used as the interpolated image, or an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation may be used as the interpolated image. In the second step, a plurality of different images (sub-images) are created from the input image data or each image whose frame rate has been converted in the first step, and the plurality of sub-images are continuously connected in time. It is a step for performing the method of displaying. By using the method according to the second step, it is possible to make the human eye perceive the original image as if it were displayed, even though a plurality of different images are actually displayed.

In the frame rate conversion method in the present embodiment, both the first step and the second step may be used, the first step may be omitted, and only the second step may be used. The second step may be omitted and only the first step may be used.

First, as a first step, a frame rate conversion of an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times will be described. (See FIG. 70) In FIG. 70, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis shows various n and m in different cases. The figure in FIG. 70 represents a schematic view of the displayed image, and represents the timing of display according to the horizontal position thereof. Further, it is assumed that the movement of the image is schematically represented by the points displayed in the figure. However, this is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. This method can be applied to various images.

The period Tin represents the period of the input image data. The cycle of the input image data corresponds to the input frame rate. For example, when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the period of the input image data is 1/60 second. Similarly, if the input frame rate is 50 Hz,
The period of the input image data is 1/50 second. In this way, the period of the input image data (unit:
Seconds) is the reciprocal of the input frame rate (unit: Hz). Various input frame rates can be used. For example, 24Hz, 50Hz, 60Hz, 70Hz,
48 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, 140 Hz, etc. can be mentioned. Here, 2
4 Hz is a frame rate used for film movies and the like. 50 Hz is a frame rate used for PAL standard video signals and the like. 60 Hz is a frame rate used for NTSC standard video signals and the like. 70 Hz is a frame rate used for a display input signal of a personal computer or the like. 48Hz, 100Hz, 120Hz,
140 Hz is a frame rate twice these. The frame rate is not limited to twice, and may be various multiples of the frame rate. As described above, according to the method shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize the conversion of the frame rate for the input signals of various standards.

The procedure for converting the frame rate of an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step is as follows.
As step 1, the kth interpolated image with respect to the first basic image (k is an integer of 1 or more; the initial value is 1).
) Is displayed. It is assumed that the display timing of the k-th interpolated image is the time when a period obtained by multiplying the period of the input image data by k (m / n) has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.
As step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the kth interpolated image is an integer. If it is an integer, the (k (m / n) +1) basic image is displayed at the display timing of the kth interpolated image, and the first step is completed. If it is not an integer, the process proceeds to step 3.
As step 3, an image to be used as the kth interpolated image is determined. Specifically, the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the kth interpolated image is converted into the form of x + y / n. Here, it is assumed that x and y are integers, and y is a number smaller than n. Then, when the kth interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the kth interpolated image is the (x + 1) th (x + 1).
) Is an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to the movement of the image from the basic image to the (x + 2) basic image multiplied by (y / n). When the kth interpolated image is the same as the basic image, the (x + 1) th basic image can be used. The method of obtaining an intermediate image as an image corresponding to the movement of the image multiplied by (y / n) will be described in detail in another part.
As step 4, the target interpolated image is moved to the next interpolated image. Specifically, the value of k is incremented by 1, and the process returns to step 1.

Next, in the procedure in the first step, the values of n and m will be specifically shown and described in detail.

The mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step may be mounted on the device or may be predetermined at the design stage of the device. If a mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is implemented in the apparatus, it is possible to switch the driving method so that the optimum operation is performed according to the situation. The situation here means the content of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation amount, etc.)
Includes altitude, acceleration, speed of movement, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the first step is predetermined at the device design stage, the optimum drive circuit can be used for each drive method, and the mechanism is further determined. As a result, it can be expected that the manufacturing cost will be reduced due to the mass production effect.

When n = 1, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1 (at the location of n = 1, m = 1 in FIG. 70), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is such that the period of the input image data is k (m) after the first basic image is displayed.
/ N) This is the time when the period of multiplying, that is, multiplying by 1 has elapsed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the first interpolated image, the second (k (m / n) + 1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is completed.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 1, the kth image is a basic image, the k + 1th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is one times the cycle of the input image data. To do.

As a concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 1 (n / m = 1),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 1th image at intervals equal to the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1th image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 1, the frame rate conversion circuit can be omitted, which has an advantage that the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1. Further, when the conversion ratio is 1, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1.

When n = 2, m = 1, that is, when the conversion ratio (n / m) is 2 (at the location of n = 2, m = 1 in FIG. 70), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is such that the period of the input image data is k (m) after the first basic image is displayed.
It is the time when the period of / n) times, that is, 1/2 times has passed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/2, it is not an integer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as the first interpolated image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 1/2 is x
Convert to + y / n form. When the coefficient is 1/2, x = 0 and y = 1. Then, when the first interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolated image is the first (x +).
1) That is, it is an intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to the movement of the image from the first basic image to the second (x + 2), that is, the second basic image, which is multiplied by y / n, that is, 1/2. 1st
When the interpolated image of is the same as the basic image, the first (x + 1), that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the first interpolated image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolated image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the target interpolated image is moved from the first interpolated image to the second interpolated image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the process returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a time when a period of k (m / n) times, that is, 1 times the cycle of the input image data has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the second interpolated image, the second (k (m / n) + 1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is completed.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/2 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 2 image and the image at an interval of 1/2 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 1/2.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

As yet another concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 2 (n / m = 2),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 2 image and the image at an interval of 1/2 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 2, it is also called double speed drive or simply double speed drive.
For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (
120Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed twice in succession for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device,
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect. This is related to the problem of insufficient write voltage due to so-called dynamic capacitance, in which the capacitance of the liquid crystal element fluctuates depending on the applied voltage. That is, by making the display frame rate larger than the input frame rate, the frequency of image data writing operations can be increased, so that obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages caused by insufficient writing voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be reduced. be able to. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 120 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

When n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3 (at the location of n = 3, m = 1 in FIG. 70), the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, in step 1, the display timing of the first interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is such that the period of the input image data is k (m) after the first basic image is displayed.
It is the time when the period of / n) times, that is, 1/3 times has passed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as the first interpolated image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 1/3 is x
Convert to + y / n form. When the coefficient is 1/3, x = 0 and y = 1. Then, when the first interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolated image is the first (x +).
1) That is, the intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to the movement of the image from the first basic image to the second (x + 2), that is, the second basic image is multiplied by y / n, that is, 1/3 times. 1st
When the interpolated image of is the same as the basic image, the first (x + 1), that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the first interpolated image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolated image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the target interpolated image is moved from the first interpolated image to the second interpolated image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the process returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a time when a period of k (m / n) times, that is, 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as the second interpolated image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. Then, when the second interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolated image is the second (x +).
1) That is, the intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to the movement of the image from the first basic image to the second (x + 2), that is, the second basic image is multiplied by y / n, that is, 2/3 times. Second
When the interpolated image of is the same as the basic image, the first (x + 1), that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the second interpolated image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolated image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the target interpolated image is moved from the second interpolated image to the third interpolated image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the process returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is a time when a period of k (m / n) times, that is, 1 times the cycle of the input image data has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 1, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolated image, the third (k (m / n) + 1), that is, the second basic image is displayed, and the first step is completed.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2nd image is an interpolated image,
The k + 3th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 3 image and the k + 3 image at an interval of 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 1/3.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image to the i + 1 image by 2/3.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

As yet another concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 3 (n / m = 3),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 3 image and the k + 3 image at an interval of 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3. Further, when the conversion ratio is 3, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3, it is also called triple speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed three times in succession for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, the AC drive of the liquid crystal display device and 180Hz
It is also effective to combine drives. That is, the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is 180H.
While setting z, the frequency of AC drive is an integral multiple or an integral fraction of that (for example, 45 Hz, 9).
By setting the frequency to 0 Hz, 180 Hz, 360 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 3/2 (at n = 3, m = 2 in FIG. 70).
In the case of, the operation in the first step is as follows. First, when k = 1, step 1
Then, the display timing of the first interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the first interpolated image is such that the period of the input image data is k after the first basic image is displayed.
This is the time when the period of (m / n) times, that is, 2/3 times has passed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the first interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as the first interpolated image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 2/3 is x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 2/3, x = 0 and y = 2. Then, when the first interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the first interpolated image is the first (x +).
1) That is, the intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to the movement of the image from the first basic image to the second (x + 2), that is, the second basic image is multiplied by y / n, that is, 2/3 times. 1st
When the interpolated image of is the same as the basic image, the first (x + 1), that is, the first basic image can be used.

By the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the first interpolated image and the image to be displayed as the first interpolated image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the target interpolated image is moved from the first interpolated image to the second interpolated image. That is, k is changed from 1 to 2, and the process returns to step 1.

When k = 2, in step 1, the display timing of the second interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the second interpolated image is a time when a period of k (m / n) times, that is, 4/3 times the cycle of the input image data has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the second interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 4/3, it is not an integer. Therefore, the process proceeds to step 3.

In step 3, an image to be used as the second interpolated image is determined. Therefore, the coefficient 4/3 is x
Convert to + y / n form. In the case of the coefficient 4/3, x = 1 and y = 1. Then, when the second interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the second interpolated image is the second (x +).
1) That is, the intermediate image obtained as an image corresponding to the movement of the image from the second basic image to the third (x + 2), that is, the third basic image is multiplied by y / n, that is, 1/3 times. Second
When the interpolated image of is the same as the basic image, the first (x + 1), that is, the second basic image can be used.

By the procedure up to this point, the display timing of the second interpolated image and the image to be displayed as the second interpolated image can be determined. Next, in step 4, the target interpolated image is moved from the second interpolated image to the third interpolated image. That is, k is changed from 2 to 3, and the process returns to step 1.

When k = 3, in step 1, the display timing of the third interpolated image with respect to the first basic image is determined. The display timing of the third interpolated image is a time when a period of k (m / n) times, that is, twice the period of the input image data has elapsed since the first basic image was displayed.

Next, in step 2, it is determined whether or not the coefficient k (m / n) used for determining the display timing of the third interpolated image is an integer. Here, since the coefficient k (m / n) is 2, it is an integer. Therefore, at the display timing of the third interpolated image, the third (k (m / n) +1), that is, the third basic image is displayed, and the first step is completed.

That is, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2nd image is an interpolated image,
The k + 3th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
Image data of the i + 1 and
The i + 2 image data and the second image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 3 image and the image at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 2/3.
The k + 2 image is 1/3 of the movement from the i + 1 image to the i + 2 image.
It is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

As yet another concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 3/2 (n / m = 3/2),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
Image data of the i + 1 and
The i + 2 image data and the second image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 3 image and the image at intervals of 2/3 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data, and is displayed.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, the conversion ratio is 3 /.
It has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where it is larger than 2.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 3/2, it is also called 3/2 times speed drive or 1.5 times speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 90.
It is Hz (90 Hz drive). Then, the images are displayed three times in succession for the two input images. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. In particular, compared with a drive method having a large drive frequency such as 120 Hz drive (double speed drive) or 180 Hz drive (3 times speed drive), the operating frequency of the circuit for which an intermediate image is obtained can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. , Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, if the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient write voltage due to dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that the trailing of moving images
It brings about a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect for obstacles such as afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 90 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 90 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integral multiple or a fraction of that (for example, 3).
By setting it to 0 Hz, 45 Hz, 90 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

For positive integers n and m other than the above, the details of the procedure are omitted, but the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m) by following the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step. it can. Of the combinations of positive integers n and m, the conversion ratio (n /
Combinations in which m) can be reduced can be treated in the same manner as the conversion ratio after reduction.

For example, when n = 4, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4 (at n = 4, m = 1 in FIG. 70),
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2nd image is an interpolated image,
The k + 3th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 4th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a more specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 4th image at an interval of 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 1/4.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 1/2.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 3/4.
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

As yet another concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 4 (n / m = 4),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 4th image at an interval of 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4, it is also called quadruple speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed four times in succession for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. In particular, 120
Compared with driving methods with a small driving frequency such as Hz drive (double speed drive) and 180 Hz drive (3x speed drive), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolated image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 30 Hz, 40 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Further, for example, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 4/3 (n = in FIG. 70).
In the case of 4, m = 3)
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2nd image is an interpolated image,
The k + 3th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 4th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a more specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
Image data of the i + 1 and
The i + 2 image data and
The i + 3 image data and the third image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 4th image at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 3/4.
The k + 2 image halves the movement from the i + 1 image to the i + 2 image.
It is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The k + 3 image is 1/4 of the movement from the i + 2 image to the i + 3 image.
It is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the doubled movement,
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 3 image data.

As yet another concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 4/3 (n / m = 4/3),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
Image data of the i + 1 and
The i + 2 image data and
The i + 3 image data and the third image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 4th image at intervals of 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data, and is displayed.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data, and is displayed.
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 3 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3. Further, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, the conversion ratio is 4/3.
It has the advantage that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where it is larger than 3.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 4/3, it is also called 4/3 times speed drive or 1.25 times speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 8.
It is 0 Hz (80 Hz drive). Then, the images are displayed four times in succession for the three input images. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. In particular, compared with a drive method having a large drive frequency such as 120 Hz drive (double speed drive) or 180 Hz drive (3 times speed drive), the operating frequency of the circuit for which an intermediate image is obtained can be reduced by motion compensation, so that an inexpensive circuit can be used. , Manufacturing cost and power consumption can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 80 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 80 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integral multiple or a fraction of that (for example).
By setting 40Hz, 80Hz, 160Hz, 240Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5 (n = 5, in FIG. 70).
In the case of m = 1)
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2nd image is an interpolated image,
The k + 3th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 4th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 5th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a more specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
The k + 4th image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 5th image at an interval of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 1/5.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 2/5.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 3/5.
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 4/5.
The k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

As yet another concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 5 (n / m = 5),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
The k + 4th image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 5th image at an interval of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5. Further, when the conversion ratio is 5, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also called 5x speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed five times in succession for one input image. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. In particular, 120
Compared with driving methods with a small driving frequency such as Hz drive (double speed drive) and 180 Hz drive (3x speed drive), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolated image. The movement can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 300 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 300 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Further, for example, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 5/2 (n = in FIG. 70).
In the case of 5, m = 2)
The kth image is a basic image,
The k + 1th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 2nd image is an interpolated image,
The k + 3th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 4th image is an interpolated image,
The k + 5th image is a basic image, and the image display cycle is 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

As a more specific expression, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
Image data of the i + 1 and
The i + 2 image data and the second image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
The k + 4th image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 5th image at an interval of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 2/5.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 4/5.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i + 1 image data to the i + 2 image data by 1/5.
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the image data corresponding to the movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i + 1 image data to the i + 2 image data by 3/5.
The k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

As yet another concrete expression, when the conversion ratio is 5/2 (n / m = 5/2),
The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
Image data of the i + 1 and
The i + 2 image data and the second image data are sequentially input as input image data at regular intervals.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
The k + 2 image and
The k + 3 image and
The k + 4th image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 5th image at an interval of 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 3 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data, and is displayed.
The k + 4 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data, and is displayed.
The k + 5 image is displayed according to the i + 2 image data.

Here, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 5/2, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5.

Specifically, when the conversion ratio is 5, it is also called 5/2 times speed drive or 2.5 times speed drive. For example, if the input frame rate is 60Hz, the display frame rate is 150H.
z (150 Hz drive). Then, the images are displayed five times in succession for the two input images. At this time, when the interpolated image is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. In particular, as compared with a drive method having a small drive frequency such as 120 Hz drive (double speed drive), an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation with higher accuracy can be used as an interpolated image, so that the motion of the moving image can be further smoothed. It is possible to significantly improve the quality of moving images. Furthermore, compared to a drive method with a large drive frequency such as 180 Hz drive (3x speed drive), the operating frequency of the circuit that obtains the intermediate image can be reduced by motion compensation, so an inexpensive circuit can be used, and manufacturing costs and power consumption can be reduced. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 150 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device is set to 150 Hz.
However, the frequency of AC drive is an integral multiple or a fraction of that (for example, 30 Hz, 50).
By setting Hz, 75 Hz, 150 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to a extent that is not perceived by the human eye.

By setting various positive integers n and m in this way, the conversion ratio can be set as an arbitrary rational number (n / m). Although detailed description is omitted, in the range where n is 10 or less,
n = 1, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 1 (1x speed drive, 60 Hz),
n = 2, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 2 (double speed drive, 120 Hz),
n = 3, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3 (3x speed drive, 180Hz),
n = 3, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 3/2 (3/2 times speed drive, 90 Hz),
n = 4, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4 (4x speed drive, 240Hz),
n = 4, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 4/3 (4/3 times speed drive, 80 Hz),
n = 5, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/1 (5x speed drive, 300 Hz),
n = 5, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/2 (5/2 times speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (5/3 times speed drive, 100 Hz),
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5/4 speed drive, 75 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (6x speed drive, 360Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (6/5 times speed drive, 72 Hz),
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (7x speed drive, 420Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7/2 times speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (7/3 times speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/4 times speed drive, 105 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (7/5 times speed drive, 84 Hz),
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/6 times speed drive, 70 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (8x speed drive, 480Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (8/3 times speed drive, 160 Hz),
n = 8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (8/5 times speed drive, 96 Hz),
n = 8, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (8/7 times speed drive, 68.6 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (9x speed drive, 540Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9/2 times speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/4 speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (9/5 times speed drive, 108 Hz),
n = 9, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (9/7 times speed drive, 77.1 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/8 times speed drive, 67.5 Hz)
,
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (10x speed drive, 600Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (10/3 times speed drive, 200H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (10/7 times speed drive, 85.7)
Hz),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (10/9 times speed drive, 66.7)
Hz),
The above combinations are conceivable. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, and for other input frame rates, the value obtained by integrating each conversion ratio with the input frame rate is the drive frequency.

When n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers n and m are not given, but the frame rate conversion procedure in the first step can be applied to various n and m. Is clear.

The conversion ratio can be determined depending on how much of the displayed images the input image data includes an image that can be displayed without motion compensation. Specifically, the smaller m is, the larger the proportion of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data. If the frequency of motion compensation is low, the frequency of operation of the circuit that compensates for motion can be reduced, so power consumption can be reduced, and the motion compensation accurately reflects the motion of the image containing the error (the motion of the image is accurately reflected). Since it is possible to reduce the possibility that an intermediate image) is created, the quality of the image can be improved. As such a conversion ratio, in the range where n is 10 or less, for example, 1,2,3,3 / 2,4.
5,5 / 2,6,7,7 / 2,8,9,9 / 2,10 can be mentioned. When such a conversion ratio is used, the quality of the image can be improved and the power consumption can be reduced, particularly when an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as the interpolated image. This is because when m is 2, the number of images that can be displayed without motion compensation in the input image data is relatively large (only 1/2 of the total number of input image data exists). ,
This is because the frequency of motion compensation is reduced. Further, when m is 1, the number of images that can be displayed without performing motion compensation on the input image data is large (equal to the total number of input image data), and motion compensation is not performed. is there. On the other hand, the larger m is, the more accurate the intermediate image created by the motion compensation can be used, so that there is an advantage that the motion of the image can be made smoother.

When the display device is a liquid crystal display device, the conversion ratio can be determined according to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Here, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the time from changing the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element to the response of the liquid crystal element. When the response time of the liquid crystal element differs depending on the amount of change in the voltage applied to the liquid crystal element, it can be the average value of the response times in a plurality of typical voltage changes. Alternatively, the response time of the liquid crystal element is MPRT (Movin).
It may be defined by g Picture Response Time).
Then, by frame rate conversion, the conversion ratio can be determined so that the image display cycle is close to the response time of the liquid crystal element. Specifically, the response time of the liquid crystal element is preferably the time from the value obtained by integrating the period of the input image data and the reciprocal of the conversion ratio to a value of about half of this value. By doing so, the image display cycle can be set to match the response time of the liquid crystal element, so that the image quality can be improved. For example, when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 4 ms or more and 8 ms or less, double speed drive (120 Hz drive) can be performed. This is because the image display cycle driven at 120 Hz is about 8 milliseconds, and half of the image display cycle driven at 120 Hz is about 4 milliseconds. Similarly, for example, when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 3 ms or more and 6 ms or less, the triple speed drive (180 Hz drive) can be performed, and the response time of the liquid crystal element is 5.
When it is millisecond or more and 11 milliseconds or less, it can be driven at 1.5 times speed (90 Hz drive), and when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 2 milliseconds or more and 4 milliseconds or less, it can be driven at 4 times speed (240 Hz drive). ), And when the response time of the liquid crystal element is 6 ms or more and 12 ms or less, 1
.. It can be driven at 25 times speed (80 Hz drive). The same applies to other drive frequencies.

The conversion ratio can also be determined by the trade-off between the quality of the moving image and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost. That is, while increasing the conversion ratio can improve the quality of moving images, decreasing the conversion ratio can reduce power consumption and manufacturing cost. That is, each conversion ratio in the range where n is 10 or less has the following advantages.

When the conversion ratio is 1, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 1, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 1. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about one time the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/2 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 3/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 3/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 3/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about two-thirds of the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 4/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 4/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 4/3. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/3. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 5/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 5/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 5/4. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 6/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 6/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 6/5. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/6 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/3. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/4. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/5. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 7/6, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 7/6, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 7/6. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 6/7 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/3. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/5. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 8/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 8/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 8/7. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/2, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/2, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/2. Further, since m is small, high image quality can be obtained and power consumption can be reduced. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 2/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/4. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 4/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/5, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/5. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 5/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/7. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 9/8, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 9/8, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 9/8. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 8/9 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10, the quality of the video can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10.
Power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10. Furthermore, m
Is small, so high image quality can be obtained while power consumption can be reduced. Furthermore, by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data,
Image quality can be improved.

When the conversion ratio is 10/3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/3. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/7, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/7, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/7. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 7/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

When the conversion ratio is 10/9, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 10/9, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 10/9. Further, since m is large, the movement of the image can be made smoother. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 9/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

It is clear that each conversion ratio in the range where n is larger than 10 has the same advantage.

Next, as a second step, an image according to the input image data or each image whose frame rate has been converted to an arbitrary rational number (n / m) times in the first step (referred to as an original image). ), A method of creating a plurality of different images (sub-images) and presenting the plurality of sub-images in succession in time will be described. By doing so, it is possible to make the human eye perceive as if one original image is displayed, even though a plurality of images are actually presented.

Here, among the sub-images created from one original image, the sub-image displayed first is referred to as a first sub-image. Here, it is assumed that the timing of displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing of displaying the original image determined in the first step. on the other hand,
The sub-image displayed after that is referred to as a second sub-image. The timing for displaying the second sub-image can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing for displaying the original image determined in the first step. The image to be actually displayed is an image created from the original image by the method in the second step. Various images can be used as the original image for creating the sub image. The number of sub-images is not limited to two and may be larger than two. In the second step, the number of sub-images is expressed as J (J is an integer of 2 or more). At this time, the sub-image displayed at the same timing as the original image determined in the first step is called the first sub-image, and the sub-images displayed thereafter are displayed. The second sub-image, the third sub-image, ...
, The Jth sub-image.

There are various methods for creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image, and the main ones are as follows. One is a method of using the original image as it is as a sub image. One is a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images. One is a method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image.

Here, the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images can be further divided into a plurality of methods. The main methods are as follows. One is a method of making at least one sub-image a black image (referred to as a black insertion method). One is
When the brightness of the original image is divided into a plurality of ranges and the brightness in the range is controlled, the method is performed by only one sub-image among all the sub-images (called a time-division gradation control method). ). One is a method in which one sub-image is a bright image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed and the other sub-image is a dark image in which the gamma value of the original image is changed (referred to as a gamma complementation method). ).

Each of the above methods will be briefly described. In the method of using the original image as it is as a sub image, the original image is used as it is as the first sub image. Further, as the second sub-image, the original image is used as it is. When this method is used, it is not necessary to operate a circuit for newly creating a sub-image, or it is not necessary to use the circuit itself, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced. In particular, in a liquid crystal display device, the first
In the step of, it is preferable to use this method after performing frame rate conversion using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as an interpolated image. This is because the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used as an interpolated image to smooth the motion of the moving image, and the same image is repeatedly displayed, resulting in insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance of the liquid crystal element. This is because obstacles such as tailing and afterimages can be reduced.

Next, in the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, a method of setting the brightness of the image and the length of the period in which the sub-images are displayed will be described in detail. Note that J represents the number of sub-images and is assumed to be an integer of 2 or more. The lowercase j is distinguished from the uppercase J. It is assumed that j is an integer of 1 or more and J or less.
The brightness of the pixels in normal hold drive is L, the period of the original image data is T,
The brightness L _j of the pixels in the sub-image of the _j, the length T _j of the period in which the sub image is displayed in the first _j, and when taking a product for L _j and T _j, from which the j = 1 Sum up to j = J (L)
_{It is preferable that 1} T ₁ + L ₂ T ₂ + ... + L _J T _J ) is equal to the product of L and T (LT) (the brightness is invariant). Furthermore, the _{T j,} the sum of j = 1 through _{j = J (T 1 + T} 2 + ··· + T J) is that is equal to the T (the display period of the original image is maintained) of preferable. Here, the fact that the brightness is unchanged and the display cycle of the original image is maintained is referred to as a sub-image distribution condition.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the black insertion method is a method of converting at least one sub-image into a black image. By doing so, since the display method can be pseudo-impulse type, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold type display method. Here, in order to prevent a decrease in the brightness of the displayed image due to the insertion of the black image, it is preferable to follow the sub-image distribution condition. However, if the situation is such that the decrease in the brightness of the displayed image is acceptable (dark surroundings, etc.), or if the user has set the decrease in the brightness of the displayed image tolerable, the sub-image You do not have to follow the distribution conditions. For example, one sub-image may be the same as the original image, and the other sub-image may be a black image. In this case, the power consumption can be reduced as compared with the case where the sub-image distribution condition is followed. Further, in the liquid crystal display device, when the overall brightness of the original image is increased without limiting the maximum value of the brightness of one of the sub-images, the brightness of the backlight is increased. Then, the sub-image distribution condition may be realized. In this case, since the sub-image distribution condition can be satisfied without controlling the voltage value written to the pixel, the operation of the image processing circuit can be omitted and the power consumption can be reduced.

The black insertion method is characterized in that _{L j of} all pixels is set to 0 in any one of the sub-images. By doing so, since the display method can be pseudo-impulse type, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold type display method.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the time-division gradation control method divides the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges and controls the brightness in the range. This is a method performed by using only one sub-image among the sub-images of. By doing so, since the display method can be pseudo-impulse type without reducing the brightness, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold type display method.

As a method of dividing the brightness of the original image into a plurality of ranges, the maximum value of the brightness (L _max ) is set.
There is a method of dividing by the number of sub-images. This is, for example, in a _{display device in which the brightness from 0 to L max} can be adjusted in 256 steps (gradation 0 to gradation 255), when the number of sub-images is 2, the gradation 0 to gradation 127. Is displayed, the brightness of one sub-image is adjusted in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255, while the brightness of the other sub-image is set to gradation 0.
When displaying gradations 128 to 255, the brightness of one of the sub-images is set to gradation 255.
On the other hand, it is a method of adjusting the brightness of the other sub-image in the range of gradation 0 to gradation 255. By doing so, the original image can be perceived by the human eye as if it were displayed, and the impulse type can be simulated, so that the quality of the moving image deteriorates due to the hold type. Can be prevented. The number of sub-images may be larger than 2. For example, when the number of sub-images is 3, the brightness level of the original image (gradation 0 to gradation 2).
55) is divided into three parts. Depending on the number of brightness stages of the original image and the number of sub-images, the number of brightness stages may not be divisible by the number of sub-images, but they are included in the range of each brightness after division. The number of brightness stages may not be exactly the same, but may be appropriately distributed.

It should be noted that the time-division gradation control method is also preferable because the same image as the original image can be displayed without lowering the brightness by satisfying the sub-image distribution condition.

Of the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the gamma complementation method uses one sub-image as a bright image in which the gamma characteristics of the original image are changed, and the other sub-image as the gamma of the original image. This is a method of producing a dark image with changed characteristics. By doing so, since the display method can be pseudo-impulse type without reducing the brightness, it is possible to prevent the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold type display method. Here, the gamma characteristic is the degree of brightness with respect to the stage (gradation) of brightness. Normally, the gamma characteristic is adjusted to be close to linear. This is because smooth gradation can be obtained by making the change in brightness proportional to the gradation, which is the stage of brightness. In the gamma complementation method, the gamma characteristic of one of the sub-images is shifted from the linearity and adjusted so that it is brighter than the linearity in the region of intermediate brightness (halftone) (the halftone becomes a brighter image than it should be). )
.. Then, the gamma characteristic of the other sub-image is also deviated from the linearity and adjusted so as to be darker than the linearity in the region of the halftone (the halftone becomes a darker image than the original). Here, the amount of one sub-image brighter than linear and the amount of the other sub-image darker than linear are
It is preferable that all gradations are approximately equal. By doing so, the original image can be perceived by the human eye as if it were displayed, and the deterioration of the quality of the moving image due to the hold type can be prevented. The number of sub-images may be larger than 2. For example, when the number of sub-images is 3, the gamma characteristics of each of the three sub-images can be adjusted so that the total amount of linear to brightened quantities and the total of linear to darkened quantities are approximately equal. Good.

It should be noted that the gamma complementation method is also preferable because the same image as the original image can be displayed without reducing the brightness by satisfying the sub-image distribution condition. further,
In gamma complement method, the change in brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to gray scale follows a gamma curve, can smoothly display the gradation respective sub image itself,
It has the advantage of improving the quality of the image that is ultimately perceived by the human eye.

The method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is a method of using one of the sub-images as an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation from the previous and next images. By doing so, the movement of the image can be smoothed, and the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Next, the relationship between the timing of displaying the sub-image and the method of creating the sub-image will be described. The timing of displaying the first sub-image is the same as the timing of displaying the original image determined in the first step, and the timing of displaying the second sub-image is the original determined in the first step. Although it can be arbitrarily determined regardless of the timing of displaying the image, the sub-image itself may be changed according to the timing of displaying the second sub-image. By doing so, even if the timing of displaying the second sub image is changed variously, it can be perceived by the human eye as if the original image was displayed. Specifically, when the timing of displaying the second sub image is earlier, the first sub image becomes brighter and the second sub image is displayed.
The sub-image of can be made darker. Further, when the timing of displaying the second sub-image is delayed, the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made brighter. This is because the brightness perceived by the human eye changes depending on the length of the period in which the image is displayed. More specifically, the brightness perceived by the human eye becomes brighter as the period of displaying the image becomes longer, and becomes darker as the period of displaying the image becomes shorter. That is, by advancing the timing of displaying the second sub-image, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image becomes shorter and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image becomes longer. As it is, the first sub-image is dark and the second sub-image is bright and perceived by the human eye. As a result, an image different from the original image will be perceived by the human eye, but in order to prevent this, the first
The sub-image of can be brighter and the second sub-image can be darker. Similarly, the second
By delaying the timing of displaying the sub-image of, the length of the period for displaying the first sub-image becomes longer, and the length of the period for displaying the second sub-image becomes shorter, the first The sub-image can be darker and the second sub-image can be brighter.

Based on the above description, the processing procedure in the second step is shown below.
As step 1, a method of creating a plurality of sub-images from one original image is determined. More specifically, the method of creating a plurality of sub-images is a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, a method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, and a method of using an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image. Can be selected from the methods used as.
As step 2, the number J of sub-images is determined. J is an integer of 2 or more.
As step 3, the brightness L _{j of the pixel in the jth sub-image and the length T j of the} period in which the j-th sub-image is displayed are determined according to the method selected in step 1. According to step 3, the length of the period in which each sub-image is displayed and the brightness of each pixel included in each sub-image are specifically determined.
As step 4, the original image is processed and actually displayed according to the items determined in each of steps 1 to 3.
As step 5, the target original image is moved to the next original image. Then, the process returns to step 1.

The mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step may be mounted on the device or may be predetermined at the design stage of the device. If a mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is implemented in the device, it is possible to switch the driving method so that the optimum operation is performed according to the situation. The situation here means the content of the image data, the environment inside and outside the device (temperature, humidity, atmospheric pressure, light, sound, magnetic field, electric field, radiation amount, etc.)
Includes altitude, acceleration, speed of movement, etc.), user settings, software version, etc. On the other hand, if the mechanism for executing the procedure in the second step is predetermined at the device design stage, the optimum drive circuit can be used for each drive method, and the mechanism is further determined. This can be expected to reduce manufacturing costs due to the effects of mass production.

Next, various driving methods determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail by showing concretely the values of n and m in the first step, respectively.

When the method of using the original image as it is as the sub image is selected in the procedure 1 in the second step, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T.
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods.
The i-th image data is data capable of giving each of a plurality of pixels a unique brightness L.
Sub-image of the j (j is 1 or more J an integer) is constituted by pixels having a specific brightness L _j, respectively, are more juxtaposed, it is displayed by the sub-image display period T _j of the j It is an image
The L, the T, the L _j , and the T _j are driving methods of a display device satisfying the sub-image distribution condition.
_{In all j, the brightness L j} of each pixel included in the jth sub-image is _{L j} = L for each pixel.
Here, as the image data sequentially prepared at a constant cycle T, the original image data created in the first step can be used. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above-mentioned driving method.

Then, when the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. 71. It will be something like.
In FIG. 71, the horizontal axis represents time, and the vertical axis shows the various n and m used in the first step in different cases.

For example, in the first step, when n = 1, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m) is 1, the driving method as shown at the location of n = 1, m = 1 in FIG. 71 is used. Become. At this time, the display frame rate is twice the frame rate of the input image data (double speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 120 Hz (120 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed twice in succession for one input image data. Here, in the case of the double speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the double speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than the double speed. Further, in step 1 of the second step,
By selecting the method of using the original image as a sub-image as it is, it is possible to stop the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation or omit the circuit itself from the device, so that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device are reduced. Can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 120 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 120 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integral multiple or a fraction of that (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz).
, 120Hz, 240Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/2 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 2, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m).
) Is 2, the driving method is as shown at the location of n = 2 and m = 1 in FIG. At this time, the display frame rate is four times the frame rate of the input image data (fourx speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 240 Hz (240 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed four times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Here, in the case of 4x speed drive, the quality of moving images can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 4x speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of higher than 4x speed. Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 240 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 240 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m).
) Is 3, the driving method is as shown at the location of n = 3, m = 1 in FIG. 71. At this time, the display frame rate is 6 times the frame rate of the input image data (6x speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 360 Hz (360 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed six times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Here, in the case of 6x speed drive, the quality of moving images can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 6x speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than 6x speed. Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 360 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 360 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/6 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 3, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m).
) Is 3/2, the driving method is as shown at the location of n = 3, m = 2 in FIG.
At this time, the display frame rate is three times the frame rate of the input image data (3x speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 180 Hz (180 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed three times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Here, 3
In the case of double speed drive, the quality of moving images can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 3 times speed, and the power consumption and manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case of higher than 3 times speed. Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 180 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 180 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 180 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/3 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m).
) Is 4, the driving method is as shown at the location of n = 4, m = 1 in FIG. 71. At this time, the display frame rate is 8 times the frame rate of the input image data (8x speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 480 Hz (480 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed eight times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Here, in the case of the 8x speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the 8x speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the 8x speed. Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device,
Since the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 480 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 480 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 120 Hz, 240 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/8 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 4, m = 3, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m).
) Is 4/3, the driving method is as shown at the location of n = 4, m = 3 in FIG. 71.
At this time, the display frame rate is 8/3 times the frame rate of the input image data (8).
/ 3x speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 160 Hz (160 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed eight times in succession for the three input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Here, in the case of 8/3 times speed drive, the quality of moving images can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than 8/3 times speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than 8/3 times speed. Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages.
Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 160 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 160 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 40 Hz, 80 Hz, 160 Hz, 320 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 3/4 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 1, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m).
) Is 5, the driving method is as shown at the location of n = 5, m = 1 in FIG. 71. At this time, the display frame rate is 10 times the frame rate of the input image data (driving at 10 times speed). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 600 Hz (600 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed 10 times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. here,
When the 10x speed drive is used, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the 10x speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is larger than the 10x speed. Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 600 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, by setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 600 Hz and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency (for example, 30 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, 120 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be prevented. It can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/10 times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, in the first step, n = 5, m = 2, that is, the conversion ratio (n / m).
) Is 5/2, the driving method is as shown at the location of n = 5, m = 2 in FIG.
At this time, the display frame rate is 5 times the frame rate of the input image data (5x speed drive). Specifically, for example, if the input frame rate is 60 Hz, the display frame rate is 300 Hz (300 Hz drive). Then, the image is displayed five times in succession for one input image data. At this time, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Here, in the case of the 5x speed drive, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the frame rate is smaller than the 5x speed, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the frame rate is higher than the 5x speed. In addition, the second
By selecting the method of using the original image as a sub-image as it is in step 1 of the step 1, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus. Power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Further, it is also effective to combine the AC drive and the 300 Hz drive of the liquid crystal display device. That is, while setting the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device to 300 Hz, the frequency of AC drive is an integral multiple or an integral fraction of that (
For example, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz, 100 Hz, etc.), the flicker that appears due to AC driving can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about 1/5 times the cycle of the input image data.

In this way, in step 1 of the second step, a method of using the original image as it is as a sub image is selected.
In step 2 of the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2.
If it is determined that T1 = T2 = T / 2 in step 3 in the second step, the first
Since the display frame rate can be further doubled with respect to the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the step of, it is possible to further improve the quality of the moving image. Further, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is larger than the display frame rate.
Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. further,
By increasing the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device and setting the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of the frequency, the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be reduced to a extent that is not perceived by the human eye. Furthermore, the response time of the liquid crystal element is the cycle of the input image data (
The image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device having about 1 / (twice the conversion ratio)) times.

Although detailed description has been omitted, it is clear that the same advantages are obtained in cases other than the conversion ratios mentioned above. For example, in the range where n is 10 or less, in addition to those listed above,
n = 5, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/3 (10/3 times speed drive, 200 Hz)
,
n = 5, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 5/4 (5/2 times speed drive, 150 Hz),
n = 6, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6 (12x speed drive, 720Hz),
n = 6, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 6/5 (12/5 times speed drive, 144 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7 (14x speed drive, 840Hz),
n = 7, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/2 (7x speed drive, 420Hz),
n = 7, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/3 (14/3 times speed drive, 280 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/4 (7/2 times speed drive, 210 Hz),
n = 7, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/5 (14/5 times speed drive, 168 Hz)
,
n = 7, m = 6, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 7/6 (7/3 times speed drive, 140 Hz),
n = 8, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8 (16x speed drive, 960Hz),
n = 8, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/3 (16/3 times speed drive, 320 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/5 (16/5 times speed drive, 192 Hz)
,
n = 8, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 8/7 (16/7 times speed drive, 137 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9 (18x speed drive, 1080Hz),
n = 9, m = 2, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/2 (9x speed drive, 540Hz),
n = 9, m = 4, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/4 (9/2 times speed drive, 270 Hz),
n = 9, m = 5, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/5 (18/5 times speed drive, 216 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/7 (18/7 times speed drive, 154 Hz)
,
n = 9, m = 8, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 9/8 (9/4 speed drive, 135 Hz),
n = 10, m = 1, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10 (20x speed drive, 1200Hz),
n = 10, m = 3, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/3 (20/3 times speed drive, 400H
z),
n = 10, m = 7, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/7 (20/7 times speed drive, 171H
z),
n = 10, m = 9, that is, conversion ratio (n / m) = 10/9 (20/9 times speed drive, 133H
z),
The above combinations are conceivable. The frequency notation is an example when the input frame rate is 60 Hz, and for other input frame rates, the drive frequency is a value obtained by integrating twice the conversion ratios with the input frame rate.

When n is an integer greater than 10, specific numbers n and m are not given, but it is clear that the procedure in the second step can be applied to various n and m. ..

When J = 2, it is particularly effective when the conversion ratio in the first step is larger than 2. This is because if the number of sub-images is made relatively small, such as J = 2, in the second step, the conversion ratio in the first step can be increased accordingly. Such conversion ratios are 3, 4, 5, 5/2, 6, 7 in the range where n is 10 or less.
, 7/2, 7/3, 8, 8/3, 9, 9/2, 9/4, 10/10/3.
When the display frame rate after the first step is such a value, by setting J = 3 or more, the advantage that the number of sub-images in the second step is small (reduction of power consumption and manufacturing cost, etc.) It is possible to achieve both the advantages of a large final display frame rate (improvement of video quality, reduction of flicker, etc.).

Here, the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2, and T ₁ = in the procedure 3.
The _{case where it is determined that T 2} = T / 2 has been described, but it is clear that the case is not limited to this.

_{For example, if T 1} <T ₂ is determined in step 3 of the second step, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined in step 3 of step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made brighter. By doing so, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the method of using the original image as the sub image as it is is selected in the procedure 1 as in the above driving method, the sub image may be displayed as it is without changing the brightness. This is because, in this case, the images used as the sub-images are the same, so that the original image can be displayed properly regardless of the display timing of the sub-images.

Further, in step 2, it is clear that the number J of the sub-images may be determined to be a value other than 2. In this case, the display frame rate can be further J times the frame rate conversion of the conversion ratio determined by the values of n and m in the first step, so that the quality of the moving image can be further improved. Is possible. Further, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the display frame rate is smaller than the display frame rate, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the display frame rate is larger than the display frame rate. Further, in step 1 of the second step, by selecting a method of using the original image as it is as a sub-image, the operation of the circuit that creates the intermediate image by motion compensation is stopped or the circuit itself is omitted from the apparatus. Therefore, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, by increasing the drive frequency of the liquid crystal display device and reducing the frequency of the AC drive to an integral multiple or a fraction of that frequency, the flicker that appears due to the AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye. it can. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

For example, when J = 3, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is smaller than 3, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 3. Has advantages. Further, the response time of the liquid crystal element is (1) of the cycle of the input image data.
The image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device having a / (three times the conversion ratio)) times.

Further, for example, when J = 4, the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is smaller than 4, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 4. It has the advantage of being able to. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (4 times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, for example, when J = 5, the quality of the moving image can be improved particularly when the number of sub-images is smaller than 5, and the power consumption and the manufacturing cost are reduced as compared with the case where the number of sub-images is larger than 5. It has the advantage of being able to. Further, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (5 times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

Further, J has similar advantages other than those listed above.

When J = 3 or more, the conversion ratio in the first step can take various values, but especially when the conversion ratio in the first step is relatively small (2 or less), J = 3
It is effective to do the above. This is because if the display frame rate after the first step is relatively small, J can be increased in the second step accordingly. Such conversion ratios are 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, in the range where n is 10 or less.
5/3, 5/4, 6/5, 7/4, 7/5, 7/6, 8/7, 9/5, 9/7, 9/8,
10/7, 10/9, and the like. Of these, the conversion ratio is 1, 2, 3/2, 4/3, 5 /
The cases of 3, 5/4 are shown in FIG. 72. As described above, when the display frame rate after the first step is a relatively small value, by setting J = 3 or more, the advantage of the small display frame rate in the first step (power consumption and manufacturing cost). It is possible to achieve both the advantages (improvement of video quality, reduction of flicker, etc.) due to the large final display frame rate (reduction, etc.).

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

When the black insertion method is selected from the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 in the second step, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T.
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods.
The i-th image data is data capable of giving each of a plurality of pixels a unique brightness L.
Sub-image of the j (j is 1 or more J an integer) is constituted by pixels having a specific brightness L _j, respectively, are more juxtaposed, it is displayed by the sub-image display period T _j of the j It is an image
The L, the T, the L _j , and the T _j are driving methods of a display device satisfying the sub-image distribution condition.
_{In at least one j, the brightness L j of} all the pixels included in the j-th sub-image is L _j.
It is characterized in that = 0.
Here, as the image data sequentially prepared at a constant cycle T, the original image data created in the first step can be used. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above-mentioned driving method.

It is clear that the above driving method can be carried out in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. 71. It will be something like.
Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 71 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in step 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image Of the methods of distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images, it is clear that the same advantage is obtained even when the black insertion method is selected. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display frame rate is large, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is small, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, the flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

In step 1 of the second step, among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the characteristic advantage of selecting the black insertion method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Because the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device.
It is possible to reduce power consumption and manufacturing cost of equipment. Further, since the impulse type display method can be used in a pseudo manner regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Here, the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2, and T ₁ = in the procedure 3.
The _{case where it is determined that T 2} = T / 2 has been described, but it is clear that the case is not limited to this.

_{For example, if T 1} <T ₂ is determined in step 3 of the second step, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined in step 3 of step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made brighter. By doing so, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. However, when the black insertion method is selected from the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 as in the above-mentioned driving method, the brightness of the sub-image is not changed. You may display it as it is. because,
In this case, if the brightness of the sub image is not changed, the overall brightness of the original image is only darkened and displayed. That is, by positively using this method for controlling the brightness of the display device, it is possible to control the brightness while improving the quality of the moving image.

Further, in step 2, it is clear that the number J of the sub-images may be determined to be a value other than 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in step 1 of the second step, among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the black insertion method is used. It is clear that it has similar advantages when selected. For example, the response time of the liquid crystal element is (1 / (J times the conversion ratio) of the period of the input image data).
The image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device which is about twice as large.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

When the time-division gradation control method is selected from the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 in the second step, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T.
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods.
The i-th image data is data capable of giving each of a plurality of pixels a unique brightness L.
The maximum value of the inherent brightness L is L _max .
Sub-image of the j (j is 1 or more J an integer) is constituted by pixels having a specific brightness L _j, respectively, are more juxtaposed, it is displayed by the sub-image display period T _j of the j It is an image
The L, the T, the L _j , and the T _j are driving methods of a display device satisfying the sub-image distribution condition.
In displaying the unique brightness L, (j-1) × L _max / J to J × L _max
The brightness in the brightness range of / J is adjusted by adjusting the brightness in only one sub-image display period out of the J sub-image display periods.
Here, as the image data sequentially prepared at a constant cycle T, the original image data created in the first step can be used. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above-mentioned driving method.

It is clear that the above driving method can be carried out in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. 71. It will be something like.
Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 71 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in step 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image. It is clear that the method of distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images has the same advantage even when the time-division gradation control method is selected. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display frame rate is large, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is small, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, the flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

Among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in step 1 of the second step, the characteristic advantage of selecting the time-division gradation control method is that the intermediate image is compensated for motion. Since the operation of the circuit for creating the image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. further,
Since the pseudo-impulse type display method can be used, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and the brightness of the display device is not reduced, so that the power consumption can be further reduced.

Here, the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2, and T ₁ = in the procedure 3.
The _{case where it is determined that T 2} = T / 2 has been described, but it is clear that the case is not limited to this.

_{For example, if T 1} <T ₂ is determined in step 3 of the second step, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined in step 3 of step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made brighter. By doing so, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. By doing so, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved.

Further, in step 2, it is clear that the number J of the sub-images may be determined to be a value other than 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in step 1 of the second step, among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the time-division gradation Clearly, it has similar advantages when the control method is selected. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described.

When the gamma complementation method is selected from the methods for distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images in the procedure 1 in the second step, the driving method is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T.
The period T is divided into J (J is an integer of 2 or more) sub-image display periods.
The i-th image data is data capable of giving each of a plurality of pixels a unique brightness L.
Sub-image of the j (j is 1 or more J an integer) is constituted by pixels having a specific brightness L _j, respectively, are more juxtaposed, it is displayed by the sub-image display period T _j of the j It is an image
The L, the T, the L _j , and the T _j are driving methods of a display device satisfying the sub-image distribution condition.
In each sub-image, the characteristics of the change in brightness with respect to gradation are shifted from linear, and the total amount of brightness shifted from linear to bright and the total amount of brightness shifted from linear to dark are , It is characterized in that it is approximately equal in all gradations.
Here, as the image data sequentially prepared at a constant cycle T, the original image data created in the first step can be used. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above-mentioned driving method.

It is clear that the above driving method can be carried out in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

Then, when the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2 in the second step and T ₁ = T ₂ = T / 2 is determined in the procedure 3, the driving method is shown in FIG. 71. It will be something like.
Since the features and advantages of the driving method (display timing at various n and m) shown in FIG. 71 have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in step 1 in the second step, the brightness of the original image. Of the methods of distributing the image to a plurality of sub-images, it is clear that the same advantage is obtained even when the gamma complementation method is selected. For example, when the interpolated image in the first step is an intermediate image obtained by motion compensation, the motion of the moving image can be smoothed, so that the quality of the moving image can be significantly improved. Further, when the display frame rate is large, the quality of the moving image can be improved, and when the display frame rate is small, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the display device is an active matrix type liquid crystal display device, the problem of insufficient writing voltage due to the dynamic capacitance can be avoided, so that a particularly remarkable image quality improvement effect is brought about against obstacles such as trailing of moving images and afterimages. Furthermore, the flicker that appears due to AC drive can be reduced to the extent that it is not perceived by the human eye.

In step 1 of the second step, among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the characteristic advantage of selecting the gamma complementation method is that an intermediate image is created by motion compensation. Since the operation of the circuit can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. Further, since the impulse type display method can be used in a pseudo manner regardless of the gradation value included in the image data, the quality of the moving image can be improved. Further, the sub-image may be obtained by directly performing gamma conversion of the image data. In this case, there is an advantage that the gamma value can be controlled in various ways depending on the magnitude of the motion of the moving image. Further, the image data may not be directly gamma-converted, but a sub-image in which the gamma value is changed may be obtained by changing the reference voltage of the digital-to-analog conversion circuit (DAC). In this case, since the image data is not directly gamma-converted, the circuit that performs gamma conversion can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, so that power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced. .. Further, in the gamma complement method, the change in brightness L _j of each sub-image with respect to gray scale follows a gamma curve, you can smoothly display the gradation respective sub image itself, and finally humans It also has the advantage of improving the quality of the image perceived by the eyes.

Here, the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2, and T ₁ = in the procedure 3.
The _{case where it is determined that T 2} = T / 2 has been described, but it is clear that the case is not limited to this.

_{For example, if T 1} <T ₂ is determined in step 3 of the second step, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined in step 3 of step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made brighter. By doing so, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In addition, like the above-mentioned driving method, procedure 1
In the method of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, when the gamma method is selected, the gamma value may be changed when changing the brightness of the sub-image. That is, the gamma value may be determined according to the display timing of the second sub-image. By doing so, the circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the apparatus, so that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost of the apparatus can be reduced.

Further, in step 2, it is clear that the number J of the sub-images may be determined to be a value other than 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but in step 1 of the second step, among the methods of distributing the brightness of the original image to a plurality of sub-images, the time-division gradation Clearly, it has similar advantages when the control method is selected. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

Next, another example of the driving method determined by the procedure in the second step will be described in detail.

In step 1 of the second step, a method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image is selected.
In step 2 of the second step, the number of sub-images is determined to be 2.
If it is determined that T1 = T2 = T / 2 in step 3 in the second step, the second step
The driving method determined by the procedure in the step of is as follows.

The i-th (i is a positive integer) image data and
The i + 1th image data and the image data are sequentially prepared at a constant period T.
The kth (k is a positive integer) image and
The first k + 1 image and
It is a driving method of a display device that sequentially displays the k + 2 image and the image at an interval of 1/2 times the period of the original image data.
The k-th image is displayed according to the i-th image data, and is displayed.
The k + 1 image is displayed according to image data corresponding to a movement obtained by multiplying the movement from the i-th image data to the i + 1 image data by 1/2.
The k + 2 image is displayed according to the i + 1 image data.
Here, as the image data sequentially prepared at a constant cycle T, the original image data created in the first step can be used. That is, all the display patterns mentioned in the description of the first step can be combined with the above-mentioned driving method.

It is clear that the above driving method can be carried out in combination for each of the various n and m used in the first step.

The characteristic advantage of selecting the method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as a sub-image in step 1 in the second step is that the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation is used in the procedure in the first step. In the case of an interpolated image, the method of obtaining the intermediate image used in the first step can be used as it is in the second step. That is, since the circuit for obtaining the intermediate image by motion compensation can be used not only in the first step but also in the second step, the circuit can be effectively used and the processing efficiency can be improved. In addition, since the movement of the image can be further smoothed, the quality of the moving image can be further improved.

Here, the number J of the sub-images is determined to be 2 in the procedure 2, and T ₁ = in the procedure 3.
The _{case where it is determined that T 2} = T / 2 has been described, but it is clear that the case is not limited to this.

_{For example, if T 1} <T ₂ is determined in step 3 of the second step, the first sub-image can be made brighter and the second sub-image can be made darker. In addition, the second
If it is determined in step 3 of step 3 that T ₁ > T ₂ , the first sub-image can be made darker and the second sub-image can be made brighter. By doing so, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. By doing so, the original image can be properly perceived by the human eye, and at the same time, the display can be pseudo-impulse driven, so that the quality of the moving image can be improved. In addition, as in the above driving method, in step 2,
When the method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as the sub image is selected, the brightness of the sub image does not have to be changed. This is because the image in the intermediate state is completed as an image by itself, and even if the display timing of the second sub-image changes, it does not change as an image perceived by the human eye. In this case, since the circuit that changes the brightness of the entire image can be stopped or the circuit itself can be omitted from the device, power consumption and manufacturing cost of the device can be reduced.

Further, in step 2, it is clear that the number J of the sub-images may be determined to be a value other than 2. Since the advantages in that case have already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted here, but the same applies when the method of using the intermediate image obtained by motion compensation as the sub-image is selected in step 1 in the second step. It is clear that it has a great advantage. For example, the image quality can be improved by applying it to a liquid crystal display device in which the response time of the liquid crystal element is about (1 / (J times the conversion ratio)) times the cycle of the input image data.

Next, a specific example of the frame rate conversion method when the input frame rate and the display frame rate are different will be described with reference to FIG. 73. In the methods shown in FIGS. 73A to 73C, it is assumed that the circular region on the image is a region whose position changes depending on the frame, and the triangular region on the image is a region whose position is substantially unchanged by the frame. There is. However,
This is an example for explanation, and the displayed image is not limited to this. The methods of FIGS. 73 (A) to 73 (C) can be applied to various images.

FIG. 73A shows a case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). When the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that the quality of the moving image can be improved as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is smaller than 2. Further, when the conversion ratio is 2, there is an advantage that the power consumption and the manufacturing cost can be reduced as compared with the case where the conversion ratio is larger than 2. FIG. 73 (
A) schematically shows the state of temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Here, the image of interest is referred to as the p-th image (p is a positive integer). Then, the image displayed next to the image of interest is the third (p + 1) image,
For the sake of convenience, the image displayed before the image of interest is displayed as the first (p-1) image, and so on, how far it is displayed from the image of interest. I will do it. Image 7301 is the p-th image, image 7302 is the (p + 1) th image, and image 730.
3 is the (p + 2) th image, image 7304 is the (p + 3) th image, and image 7305 is the (p + 3) th image.
It is assumed that it is the image of 4). The period Tin represents the period of the input image data. Since FIG. 73A shows a case where the conversion ratio is 2, the period Tin is twice the period from the display of the p-th image to the display of the (p + 1) th image. It becomes the length.

Here, the (p + 1) th image 7302 is the p + 1th (p + 2) image 7 from the pth image 7301.
The image may be created so as to be in an intermediate state between the first image 7301 and the (p + 2) image 7303 by detecting the amount of change in the image up to 303. In FIG. 73 (A), the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region whose position changes depending on the frame (circular region) and a region whose position hardly changes depending on the frame (triangular region). That is, the position of the circular region in the (p + 1) th image 7302 is the position of the p-th image 7301.
The position is intermediate between the position in (p + 2) and the position in the third (p + 2) image 7303. That is, the third (p + 1) image 7302 is obtained by interpolating the image data with motion compensation. In this way, it is possible to perform a smooth display by performing motion compensation on a moving object on the image and interpolating the image data.

Further, the (p + 1) th image 7302 is an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled by a certain rule after being created so as to be in an intermediate state between the pth image 7301 and the (p + 2) th image 7303. You may. The fixed rule is, for example, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), the image 73 of the first p.
When the representative brightness of 01 is L and the representative brightness of the (p + 1) th image 7302 is Lc, there may be a relationship of L> Lc between L and Lc. Desirably, 0.1 L <Lc <0.
There may be a relationship of 8L. More preferably, there may be a relationship of 0.2L <Lc <0.5L. Alternatively, conversely, L and Lc may have a relationship of L <Lc. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1 Lc <L <0.8 Lc. More preferably, 0
.. There may be a relationship of 2Lc <L <0.5Lc. By doing so, the display can be pseudo-impulse type, so that afterimages of the eyes can be suppressed.

The typical brightness of the image will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 74.

As you can see, there are two different causes for video blur (the movement of the image is not smooth,
And by solving the afterimage of the eyes at the same time, the moving image blur can be significantly reduced.

Further, the (p + 3) th image 7304 may also be created from the (p + 2) th image 7303 and the (p + 4) th image 7305 using the same method. That is, the first (p
The image 7304 of +3) is from the image 7303 of the (p + 2) th image 7305 to the image 7305 of the (p + 4) th (p + 4).
By detecting the amount of change in the images up to, the (p + 2) th image 7303 and the (p + 4) th image
The image may be created so as to be in the intermediate state of the image 7305 of the above, and may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled by a certain rule.

FIG. 73B shows a case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 73 (B) schematically shows the state of temporal changes in the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Image 7311 is the p-th image, image 7312 is the (p + 1) th image, image 7313 is the (p + 2) th image, image 7314 is the (p + 3) th image, image 7315 is the (p + 4) th image, image 7316. Is the (p + 5) th image, image 7
It is assumed that 317 is the third (p + 6) image. The period Tin represents the period of the input image data. Since FIG. 73 (B) shows a case where the conversion ratio is 3, the period Tin is set to 1.
The length from the display of the p-th image to the display of the (p + 1) th image is three times as long as the period.

Here, the (p + 1) th image 7312 and the (p + 2) th image 7313 detect the amount of change in the images from the pth image 7311 to the (p + 3) th image 7314, thereby detecting the change amount of the pth image 7311. And the image created so as to be in the intermediate state of the third (p + 3) image 7314 may be used. In FIG. 73B, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region whose position changes depending on the frame (circular region) and a region whose position hardly changes depending on the frame (triangular region). That is, the (p + 1) th image 7312 and the (p + 1) th image.
The position of the circular region in the image 7313 of 2) is the position in the image 7311 of the pth p.
The position is intermediate between the positions in the third (p + 3) image 7314. Specifically, when the amount of movement of the circular region detected from the first p image 7311 and the (p + 3) image 7314 is X, the position of the circular region in the (p + 1) th image 7312 is It may be a position displaced by about (1/3) X from the position in the first image 7311. Further, the position of the circular region in the (p + 2) th image 7313 may be a position displaced by about (2/3) X from the position in the third p image 7311. That is, the third (p + 1) image 7
The 312 and the (p + 2) th image 7313 are motion-compensated and interpolated image data. In this way, it is possible to perform a smooth display by performing motion compensation on a moving object on the image and interpolating the image data.

Further, the (p + 1) th image 7312 and the (p + 2) th image 7313 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the first p image 7311 and the third (p + 3) image 7314, and the brightness of the images is constant. It may be an image controlled by the rule of. Certain rules are, for example, FIG.
As shown in 3 (B), the typical brightness of the first image 7311 is L, and the representative brightness of the first (p + 1) image 731 is set to L.
When the representative brightness of 2 is Lc1 and the representative brightness of the third (p + 2) image 7313 is Lc2, L> Lc1 or L> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2 in L, Lc1 and Lc2.
There may be a relationship. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1L <Lc1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, there may be a relationship of 0.2L <Lc = Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1 and Lc2, L <Lc1 or L <Lc2.
Alternatively, there may be a relationship of Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1Lc1 = 0.1L
There may be a relationship of c2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably
There may be a relationship of 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5Lc2. By doing so, the display can be pseudo-impulse type, so that afterimages of the eyes can be suppressed. Alternatively, images with varying brightness may appear alternately. By doing so, the period in which the brightness changes can be shortened, so that flicker can be reduced.

As you can see, there are two different causes for video blur (the movement of the image is not smooth,
And by solving the afterimage of the eyes at the same time, the moving image blur can be significantly reduced.

Further, the (p + 4) th image 7315 and the (p + 5) th image 7316 may also be created from the (p + 3) th image 7314 and the (p + 6) th image 7317 using the same method. That is, the (p + 4) th image 7315 and the (p + 5) th image 73.
Reference numeral 16 denotes an intermediate state between the (p + 3) image 7314 and the (p + 6) image 7317 by detecting the amount of change in the images from the (p + 3) th image 7314 to the (p + 6) th image 7317. The image created as described above may be an image in which the brightness of the image is controlled by a certain rule.

When the method of FIG. 73B is used, since the display frame rate is large, the movement of the image can follow the movement of the eyes well, and the movement of the image can be displayed smoothly, so that the moving image is blurred. Can be significantly reduced.

In FIG. 73 (C), the display frame rate is 1.5 times the input frame rate (conversion ratio 1.5).
). FIG. 73C schematically shows the state of temporal changes in the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. Image 7321 is the first image, image 732.
2 is the (p + 1) th image, image 7323 is the (p + 2) th image, and image 7324 is the (p + +) th image.
It is assumed that it is the image of 3). Although it may not be actually displayed, the image 7325 is input image data, and may be used for creating the (p + 1) th image 7322 and the (p + 2) th image 7323. The period Tin represents the period of the input image data. Since FIG. 73 (C) shows a case where the conversion ratio is 1.5, the period Tin is set to 1.
The length from the display of the p-th image to the display of the (p + 1) th image is 1.5 times the period.

Here, the (p + 1) th image 7322 and the (p + 2) th image 7323 detect the amount of change in the images from the pth image 7321 to the third (p + 3) image 7324 via the image 7325. , The image created so as to be in the intermediate state between the image 7321 of the p-th and the image 7324 of the (p + 3) th (p + 3). In FIG. 73C, the state of the image in the intermediate state is represented by a region whose position changes depending on the frame (circular region) and a region whose position hardly changes depending on the frame (triangular region). That is, the position of the circular region in the (p + 1) th image 7322 and the (p + 2) th image 7323 is the position of the p-th image 7.
The position is intermediate between the position in 321 and the position in the third (p + 3) image 7324. That is, the (p + 1) th image 7322 and the (p + 2) th image 7323 are motion-compensated and interpolated image data. In this way, it is possible to perform a smooth display by performing motion compensation on a moving object on the image and interpolating the image data.

Further, the (p + 1) th image 7322 and the (p + 2) th image 7323 are created so as to be in an intermediate state between the first p image 7321 and the third (p + 3) image 7324, and the brightness of the images is constant. It may be an image controlled by the rule of. Certain rules are, for example, FIG.
As shown in 3 (C), the typical brightness of the pth image 7321 is L, and the representative brightness of the pth image 7321 is L, and the th (p + 1) image 732
When the representative brightness of 2 is Lc1 and the representative brightness of the third (p + 2) image 7323 is Lc2, L> Lc1 or L> Lc2 or Lc1 = Lc2 in L, Lc1 and Lc2.
There may be a relationship. Desirably, there may be a relationship of 0.1L <Lc1 = Lc2 <0.8L. More preferably, there may be a relationship of 0.2L <Lc = Lc2 <0.5L. Or, conversely, in L, Lc1 and Lc2, L <Lc1 or L <Lc2.
Alternatively, there may be a relationship of Lc1 = Lc2. Desirably, 0.1Lc1 = 0.1L
There may be a relationship of c2 <L <0.8Lc1 = 0.8Lc2. More preferably
There may be a relationship of 0.2Lc1 = 0.2Lc2 <L <0.5Lc1 = 0.5Lc2. By doing so, the display can be pseudo-impulse type, so that afterimages of the eyes can be suppressed. Alternatively, images with varying brightness may appear alternately. By doing so, the period in which the brightness changes can be shortened, so that flicker can be reduced.

As you can see, there are two different causes for video blur (the movement of the image is not smooth,
And by solving the afterimage of the eyes at the same time, the moving image blur can be significantly reduced.

When the method of FIG. 73C is used, since the display frame rate is small, the time for writing the signal to the display device can be lengthened. Therefore, the clock frequency of the display device can be reduced, so that the power consumption can be reduced. Further, since the processing speed for motion compensation can be slowed down, the power consumption can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the typical brightness of the image will be described. FIGS. 74 (A) to 74 (D)
) Is a schematic representation of the temporal change of the displayed image with the horizontal axis as time. FIG. 74 (E) is an example of a method of measuring the brightness of an image in a certain area.

As a method of measuring the brightness of an image, there is a method of individually measuring the brightness of each pixel constituting the image. Using this method, it is possible to measure the brightness precisely in every detail of the image.

However, since the method of individually measuring the brightness of each pixel constituting the image requires a great deal of labor, another method may be used. Another method of measuring the brightness of an image is to focus on a certain area in the image and measure the average brightness of that area. By this method, the brightness of the image can be easily measured. In the present embodiment, the brightness obtained by the method of measuring the average brightness of a certain area in the image is referred to as a representative brightness of the image for convenience.

Then, in order to obtain the typical brightness of the image, the point of paying attention to which region in the image will be described below.

FIG. 74A shows an example of a method in which the brightness of a region (triangular region) whose position hardly changes with respect to a change in the image is set as a typical brightness of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, the image 7401 is the pth image, the image 7402 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 7403 is the (p + 2) image, and the first region 7404 is the brightness in the pth image 7401. The measurement region, the second region 7405, is the brightness measurement region in the third (p + 1) image 7402, the third region 74.
06 represents the luminance measurement region in the third (p + 2) image 7403, respectively. Here, the first to third regions may be substantially the same as the spatial positions in the apparatus.
That is, by measuring the typical brightness of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the time change of the typical brightness of the image.

By measuring the typical brightness of the image, it is possible to determine whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the brightness measured in the first region 7404 is L, the second
When the brightness measured in the region 7405 of No. 7405 is Lc, if Lc <L, it can be said that the display is a pseudo impulse type. At such times, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improving.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical luminance change amount (relative luminance) of the image with respect to the time change is in the following range. As the relative brightness, for example, the first region 7404 and the second region 7405, the second region 7405 and the third region 7
For each of the 406, the first region 7404, and the third region 7406, the ratio of the smaller brightness to the larger brightness can be set. That is, when the amount of change in the typical brightness of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative brightness is 100%. And the relative brightness is 8
If it is 0% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, when the relative brightness is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the relative brightness is 10% or more, the power consumption can be reduced and the flicker can be suppressed. In particular, when the relative brightness is 20% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is, the relative brightness is 10% or more and 80.
When it is less than%, it is possible to improve the quality of moving images and reduce power consumption and flicker. Further, when the relative brightness is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be remarkably reduced.

FIG. 74B shows an example of a method of measuring the brightness of a tile-shaped divided region and using the average value as a typical brightness of an image. Period Tin is the cycle of input image data, image 7411
Is the p-th image, image 7412 is the (p + 1) th image, image 7413 is the (p + 2) th image, the first region 7414 is the luminance measurement region in the p-p image 7411, and the second region 7415.
Is the brightness measurement region in the third (p + 1) image 7412, and the third region 7416 is the third (p + 2)
) Represents each of the luminance measurement regions in the image 7413. Here, the first to the third
Regions may be approximately the same in terms of spatial location within the device. That is, by measuring the typical brightness of the image in the first to third regions, it is possible to obtain the time change of the typical brightness of the image.

By measuring the typical brightness of the image, it is possible to determine whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, when the average value of the brightness measured in the first region 7414 in all regions is L and the average value of the brightness measured in the second region 7415 is Lc, Lc <L. For example, it can be said that the display is pseudo-impulse type.
At such times, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improving.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical luminance change amount (relative luminance) of the image with respect to the time change is in the following range. As the relative brightness, for example, the first region 7414 and the second region 7415, the second region 7415 and the third region 7
For each of the 416, the first region 7414 and the third region 7416, the ratio of the smaller brightness to the larger brightness can be set. That is, when the amount of change in the typical brightness of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative brightness is 100%. And the relative brightness is 8
If it is 0% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, when the relative brightness is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the relative brightness is 10% or more, the power consumption can be reduced and the flicker can be suppressed. In particular, when the relative brightness is 20% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is, the relative brightness is 10% or more and 80.
When it is less than%, it is possible to improve the quality of moving images and reduce power consumption and flicker. Further, when the relative brightness is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be remarkably reduced.

FIG. 74 (C) shows an example of a method of measuring the brightness of the central region of the image and using the average value as a typical brightness of the image. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, the image 7421 is the p-th image, the image 7422 is the (p + 1) th image, the image 7423 is the (p + 2) image, and the first region 7424 is the brightness in the p-p image 7421. The measurement region, the second region 7425, is the first (p.
The brightness measurement region in the image 7422 of +1) and the third region 7426 represent the brightness measurement region in the image 7423 of the third (p + 2), respectively.

By measuring the typical brightness of the image, it is possible to determine whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, the brightness measured in the first region 7424 is L, the second
When the brightness measured in the region 7425 of No. 7425 is Lc, if Lc <L, it can be said that the display is a pseudo-impulse type. At such times, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improving.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical luminance change amount (relative luminance) of the image with respect to the time change is in the following range. As the relative brightness, for example, the first region 7424 and the second region 7425, the second region 7425 and the third region 7
For each of the 426, the first region 7424 and the third region 7426, the ratio of the smaller brightness to the larger brightness can be set. That is, when the amount of change in the typical brightness of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative brightness is 100%. And the relative brightness is 8
If it is 0% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, when the relative brightness is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the relative brightness is 10% or more, the power consumption can be reduced and the flicker can be suppressed. In particular, when the relative brightness is 20% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is, the relative brightness is 10% or more and 80.
When it is less than%, it is possible to improve the quality of moving images and reduce power consumption and flicker. Further, when the relative brightness is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be remarkably reduced.

FIG. 74 (D) shows an example of a method of measuring the brightness of a plurality of points sampled from the entire image and using the average value as a typical brightness of the image. Period Tin is the cycle of input image data,
Image 7431 is the p-th image, image 7432 is the (p + 1) th image, and image 7433 is the (p + 1) th image.
In the image of +2), the first region 7434 is the luminance measurement region in the first p image 7431, the second region 7435 is the luminance measurement region in the third (p + 1) image 7432, and the third region 7436.
Represents the luminance measurement region in the third (p + 2) image 7433, respectively.

By measuring the typical brightness of the image, it is possible to determine whether or not the display is pseudo-impulse type. For example, when the average value of the brightness measured in the first region 7434 in all regions is L and the average value of the brightness measured in the second region 7435 is Lc, Lc <L. For example, it can be said that the display is pseudo-impulse type.
At such times, it can be said that the quality of the moving image is improving.

In the luminance measurement region, the image quality can be improved when the typical luminance change amount (relative luminance) of the image with respect to the time change is in the following range. As the relative brightness, for example, the first region 7434 and the second region 7435, the second region 7435 and the third region 7
For each of the 436, the first region 7434 and the third region 7436, the ratio of the smaller brightness to the larger brightness can be set. That is, when the amount of change in the typical brightness of the image with respect to the change in time is 0, the relative brightness is 100%. And the relative brightness is 8
If it is 0% or less, the quality of the moving image can be improved. In particular, when the relative brightness is 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved. Further, when the relative brightness is 10% or more, the power consumption can be reduced and the flicker can be suppressed. In particular, when the relative brightness is 20% or more, power consumption and flicker can be significantly reduced. That is, the relative brightness is 10% or more and 80.
When it is less than%, it is possible to improve the quality of moving images and reduce power consumption and flicker. Further, when the relative brightness is 20% or more and 50% or less, the quality of the moving image can be remarkably improved, and the power consumption and the flicker can be remarkably reduced.

FIG. 74 (E) is a diagram showing a measurement method in the luminance measurement region in the figures shown in FIGS. 74 (A) to 74 (D). The area 7441 is the brightness measurement area of interest, and the point 7442 is the brightness measurement point in the brightness measurement area 7441. A luminance measuring device having high time resolution may have a small measurement target range. Therefore, when the area 7441 is large, the area 7441 is pointed as shown in FIG. 74 (E) instead of measuring the entire area. It may be measured at a plurality of points without any bias in a shape, and the average value thereof may be used as the brightness of the region 7441.

When the image has a combination of the three primary colors R, G, and B, the measured brightness is R, G.
, B may be combined, R and G may be combined, G and B may be combined, B and R may be combined, and R, G, and B may be combined. It may be brightness.

Next, how to detect the movement of the image included in the input image data and create an image in the intermediate state,
A method of controlling the driving method according to the movement of the image included in the input image data and the like will be described.

An example of a method of detecting the movement of an image included in the input image data and creating an image in an intermediate state will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75A shows a case where the display frame rate is twice the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 2). FIG. 75A schematically shows a method of detecting the movement of an image with the horizontal axis as time. The period Tin is the period of the input image data, the image 7501 is the p-th image, and the image 7502 is the (p + 1) th image.
Image 7503 represents the (p + 2) th image, respectively. Further, in the image, as a time-independent region, the first region 7504, the second region 7505, and the third region 750 are used.
6 is provided.

First, in the third (p + 2) image 7503, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped regions.
Focus on the image data in the third region 7506, which is one of the regions.

Next, in the third image 7501, the third region 750 centered on the third region 7506.
Focus on a range larger than 6. Here, the third region 7 centered on the third region 7506.
A range larger than 506 is a data search range. The data search range is 7507 in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 7508 in the vertical direction (Y direction). The horizontal range 7507 and the vertical range 7508 of the data search range may be a range obtained by expanding the horizontal range and the vertical range of the third region 7506 by about 15 pixels, respectively.

Then, within the data search range, an area having the image data most similar to the image data in the third area 7506 is searched. As the search method, a least squares method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, it is assumed that the first region 7504 is derived as the region having the most similar image data.

Next, the vector 7509 is derived as a quantity representing the difference in position between the derived first region 7504 and the third region 7506. The vector 7509 will be referred to as a motion vector.

Then, in the first (p + 1) image 7502, the vector 7510 obtained from the motion vector 7509, the image data in the third region 7506 in the third (p + 2) image 7503, and the first image in the first p image 7501. A second region 7505 is formed by the image data in the region 7504.

Here, the vector 7510 obtained from the motion vector 7509 will be referred to as a displacement vector. The displacement vector 7510 serves to determine the position that forms the second region 7505. The second region 7505 is formed at a position separated from the third region 7506 by the displacement vector 7510. The displacement vector 7510 has a coefficient (1/2) of the motion vector 7509.
It may be the amount multiplied by.

The image data in the second region 7505 in the second (p + 1) image 7502 is the second (p + 2).
) May be determined by the image data in the third region 7506 in the image 7503 and the image data in the first region 7504 in the first image 7501. For example
The image data in the second region 7505 in the second (p + 1) image 7502 is the second (p + 2).
) May be the average value of the image data in the third region 7506 in the image 7503 and the image data in the first region 7504 in the first image 7501.

In this way, it corresponds to the third region 7506 in the third (p + 2) image 7503.
A second region 7505 in the second (p + 1) image 7502 can be formed. By performing the above processing on other regions in the (p + 2) image 7503, the first (p + 2)
Image 7 of the (p + 1) th, which is an intermediate state between the image 7503 of p + 2) and the image 7501 of the pth p.
502 can be formed.

FIG. 75B shows a case where the display frame rate is three times the input frame rate (conversion ratio is 3). FIG. 75B schematically shows a method of detecting the movement of an image with the horizontal axis as time. Period Tin is the cycle of input image data, image 7511
Is a p-th image, image 7512 is a (p + 1) th image, image 7513 is a (p + 2) th image, and image 7514 is a (p + 3) th image. Further, in the image, as a time-independent region, a first region 7515, a second region 7516, and a third region 7517
And a fourth area 7518 is provided.

First, in the third (p + 3) image 7514, the image is divided into a plurality of tile-shaped regions.
Focus on the image data in the fourth region 7518, which is one of the regions.

Next, in the image 7511 of p, the fourth region 751 centered on the fourth region 7518.
Focus on a range larger than 8. Here, the fourth region 7 centered on the fourth region 7518.
A range larger than 518 is a data search range. The data search range is 7519 in the horizontal direction (X direction) and 7520 in the vertical direction (Y direction). The horizontal range 7519 and the vertical range 7520 of the data search range may be a range obtained by expanding the horizontal range and the vertical range of the fourth region 7518 by about 15 pixels, respectively.

Then, within the data search range, an area having image data most similar to the image data in the fourth area 7518 is searched. As the search method, a least squares method or the like can be used. As a result of the search, it is assumed that the first region 7515 is derived as the region having the most similar image data.

Next, the vector 7521 is derived as a quantity representing the difference in position between the derived first region 7515 and the fourth region 7518. The vector 7521 will be referred to as a motion vector.

Then, in the (p + 1) th image 7512 and the (p + 2) th image 7513,
By the vectors 7522 and 7523 obtained from the motion vector 7521, the image data in the fourth region 7518 in the (p + 3) image 7515, and the image data in the first region 7515 in the first image 7511. It forms a second region 7516 and a third region 7517.

Here, the vector 7522 obtained from the motion vector 7521 will be referred to as the first displacement vector. Further, the vector 7523 will be referred to as a second displacement vector. The first displacement vector 7522 serves to determine the position forming the second region 7516. The second region 7516 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 7518 by the first displacement vector 7522. The displacement vector 7522 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 7521 by (1/3). Further, the second displacement vector 7523 has a role of determining a position for forming the third region 7517. The third region 7517 is formed at a position separated from the fourth region 7518 by the second displacement vector 7523. The displacement vector 7523 may be an amount obtained by multiplying the motion vector 7521 by (2/3).

The image data in the second region 7516 in the second (p + 1) image 7512 is the third (p + 3).
) May be determined by the image data in the fourth region 7518 in the image 7514 and the image data in the first region 7515 in the first image 7511. For example
The image data in the second region 7516 in the second (p + 1) image 7512 is the third (p + 3).
) May be the average value of the image data in the fourth region 7518 in the image 7514 and the image data in the first region 7515 in the image 7511 of the first p.

The image data in the third region 7517 in the third (p + 2) image 7513 is the third (p + 3) image.
) May be determined by the image data in the fourth region 7518 in the image 7514 and the image data in the first region 7515 in the first image 7511. For example
The image data in the third region 7517 in the third (p + 2) image 7513 is the third (p + 3) image.
) May be the average value of the image data in the fourth region 7518 in the image 7514 and the image data in the first region 7515 in the image 7511 of the first p.

In this way, it corresponds to the fourth region 7518 in the third (p + 3) image 7514.
The second region 7516 in the second (p + 1) image 7502, and the second (p + 2) image 7
A third region 7517 in 513 can be formed. In addition, the above processing is the first (
By applying to other regions in the image 7514 of p + 3), the image 751 of the third (p + 3)
The first (p + 1) image 7512 and the first (p +), which are intermediate states between the fourth and pth images 7511.
The image 7513 of 2) can be formed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, an example of a circuit that detects the movement of the image included in the input image data and creates an image in the intermediate state will be described. FIG. 76A is a diagram showing a connection relationship between a peripheral drive circuit including a source driver and a gate driver for displaying an image in a display area and a control circuit for controlling the peripheral drive circuit. FIG. 76B is a diagram showing an example of a detailed circuit configuration of the control circuit. FIG. 76C is a diagram showing an example of a detailed circuit configuration of the image processing circuit included in the control circuit. FIG. 76 (D) is a diagram showing another example of a detailed circuit configuration of the image processing circuit included in the control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the apparatus according to the present embodiment may include a control circuit 7611, a source driver 7612, a gate driver 7613, and a display area 7614.

The control circuit 7611, the source driver 7612, and the gate driver 7613 may be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display area 7614 is formed.

The control circuit 7611, the source driver 7612, and the gate driver 7613 are partially formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display area 7614 is formed.
The other circuits may be formed on a substrate different from the substrate on which the display region 7614 is formed. For example, the source driver 7612 and the gate driver 7613 may be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display area 7614 is formed, and the control circuit 7611 may be formed as an external IC on a different substrate. Similarly, the gate driver 7613 may be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display region 7614 is formed, and the other circuits may be formed as external ICs on a different substrate. Similarly, source driver 7612
, The gate driver 7613 and a part of the control circuit 7611 may be formed on the same substrate as the substrate on which the display area 7614 is formed, and the other circuits may be formed as external ICs on different substrates.

The control circuit 7611 receives an external image signal 7600, a horizontal synchronization signal 7601, and a vertical synchronization signal 7602, and receives an image signal 7603, a source start pulse 7604, a source clock 7605, a gate start pulse 7606, and a gate. Clock 7607 and
May be output.

The source driver 7612 may be configured such that an image signal 7603, a source start pulse 7604, and a source clock 7605 are input and a voltage or current according to the image signal 7603 is output to the display area 7614.

The gate driver 7613 has a gate start pulse 7606 and a gate clock 7607.
, And may be input, and a signal specifying the timing for writing the signal output from the source driver 7612 to the display area 7614 may be output.

When the frequency of the external image signal 7600 and the frequency of the image signal 7603 are different, the signal for controlling the timing of driving the source driver 7612 and the gate driver 7613 is also different from the input horizontal synchronization signal 7601 and vertical synchronization signal 7602. Will have different frequencies. Therefore, in addition to processing the image signal 7603, it is necessary to process a signal that controls the timing of driving the source driver 7612 and the gate driver 7613. The control circuit 7611 may be a circuit having a function for that purpose. For example, when the frequency of the image signal 7603 is doubled with respect to the frequency of the external image signal 7600, the control circuit 7611 interpolates the image signal included in the external image signal 7600 to generate the image signal 7603 having the double frequency. At the same time, the timing control signal is also controlled to double the frequency.

Further, the control circuit 7611 may include an image processing circuit 7615 and a timing generation circuit 7616 as shown in FIG. 76 (B).

The image processing circuit 7615 may be configured such that an external image signal 7600 and a frequency control signal 7608 are input and an image signal 7603 is output.

The timing generation circuit 7616 receives a horizontal synchronization signal 7601 and a vertical synchronization signal 7602, and receives a source start pulse 7604, a source clock 7605, a gate start pulse 7606, a gate clock 7607, and a frequency control signal 7608. May be output. The timing generation circuit 7616 is a frequency control signal 760.
It may include a memory, a register, or the like that holds data for designating the state of 8. Further, the timing generation circuit 7616 may have a configuration in which a signal specifying the state of the frequency control signal 7608 is input from the outside.

As shown in FIG. 76C, the image processing circuit 7615 includes a motion detection circuit 7620, a first memory 7621, a second memory 7622, a third memory 7623, and a brightness control circuit 762.
3 and the high-speed processing circuit 7625 may be included.

The motion detection circuit 7620 may be configured such that a plurality of image data are input, motion of the image is detected, and image data which is an intermediate state of the plurality of image data is output.

An external video signal 7600 is input to the first memory 7621, and the external video signal 7600 is input.
The external video signal 7600 may be output to the motion detection circuit 7620 and the second memory 7622 while holding the above for a certain period of time.

The image data output from the first memory 7621 is input to the second memory 7622, and the image data is input to the second memory 7622.
The image data may be output to the motion detection circuit 7620 and the high-speed processing circuit 7625 while holding the image data for a certain period of time.

The image data output from the motion detection circuit 7620 is input to the third memory 7623.
The image data may be output to the luminance control circuit 7624 while holding the image data for a certain period of time.

The high-speed processing circuit 7625 receives the image data output from the second memory 7622, the image data output from the brightness control circuit 7624, and the frequency control signal 7608, and uses the image data as the image signal 7603. It may be configured to output.

When the frequency of the external image signal 7600 and the frequency of the image signal 7603 are different, the image processing circuit 7615 may interpolate the image signal included in the external image signal 7600 to generate the image signal 7603. The input external image signal 7600 is once stored in the first memory 7.
It is held at 621. At that time, the image data input in the previous frame is held in the second memory 7622. The motion detection circuit 7620 appropriately reads the image data held in the first memory 7621 and the second memory 7622, detects the motion vector from the difference between the two image data, and further generates the image data in the intermediate state. You may. The generated intermediate state image data is held by the third memory 7623.

When the motion detection circuit 7620 is generating the image data in the intermediate state, the high-speed processing circuit 762
5 outputs the image data held in the second memory 7622 as an image signal 7603. After that, the image data held in the third memory 7623 is transferred to the brightness control circuit 7624.
It is output as an image signal 7603 through. At this time, the second memory 7622 and the third memory
The frequency at which the memory 7623 is updated is the same as the frequency of the external image signal 7600, but the frequency of the image signal 7603 output through the high-speed processing circuit 7625 is the frequency of the external image signal 760.
It may be different from the frequency of 0. Specifically, for example, the frequency of the image signal 7603 is 1.5 times, 2 times, or 3 times the frequency of the external image signal 7600. However, the frequency is not limited to this, and various frequencies can be used. The frequency of the image signal 7603 may be specified by the frequency control signal 7608.

The configuration of the image processing circuit 7615 shown in FIG. 76 (D) is the configuration of the image processing circuit 7615 shown in FIG. 76 (C) with the addition of a fourth memory 7626. In this way, in addition to the image data output from the first memory 7621 and the image data output from the second memory 7622, the image data output from the fourth memory 7626 is also the motion detection circuit 7620.
By outputting to, it becomes possible to accurately detect the movement of the image.

If the input image data already contains a motion vector for data compression or the like, for example, MPEG (Moving Picture Expert Gr).
When the image data is based on the standard of up), the image in the intermediate state may be generated as an interpolated image by using the image data. At this time, the part that generates the motion vector, which is included in the motion detection circuit 7620, becomes unnecessary. Further, since the encoding and decoding processing related to the image signal 7623 is also simplified, the power consumption can be reduced.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment may be applied, combined, or replaced with respect to the content (which may be a part) described in the figure of another embodiment. Can be done freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments are improved as an example when they are embodied, an example when they are slightly deformed, and an example when a part is changed. An example of the case,
An example of the case described in detail, an example of the case of application, an example of related parts, and the like are shown. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiments.

(Embodiment 11)
In this embodiment, the structure and manufacturing method of the transistor will be described.

FIG. 48 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the transistor included in the display device according to the present invention and how to manufacture the transistor. FIG. 48A is a diagram showing an example of the structure of a transistor included in the display device according to the present invention. Further, FIGS. 48 (B) to 48 (G) are views showing an example of a method for manufacturing a transistor included in the display device according to the present invention.

The structure and manufacturing method of the transistor included in the display device according to the present invention is not limited to that shown in FIG. 48, and various structures and manufacturing methods can be used.

First, an example of the transistor structure of the display device according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (A). FIG. 48 (A) is a cross-sectional view of a transistor having a plurality of different structures. Here, in FIG. 48A, a plurality of transistors having different structures are shown side by side, but this is for explaining the structure of the transistors of the display device according to the present invention, and is actually used. It is not necessary to juxtapose them as shown in FIG. 48 (A), and they can be made separately as needed.

Next, each layer constituting the transistor included in the display device according to the present invention will be described.

As the substrate 4011, a glass substrate such as barium borosilicate glass or aluminoborosilicate glass, a quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate containing stainless steel, or the like can be used.
In addition, polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene naphthalate (PEN)
It is also possible to use a substrate made of a flexible synthetic resin such as plastic or acrylic represented by Polyetersalphon (PES). By using a flexible substrate, it becomes possible to manufacture a display device that can be bent.

The insulating film 4012 functions as a base film. This base film is provided from the substrate 4011 in order to prevent an alkali metal such as Na or an alkaline earth metal from adversely affecting the characteristics of the semiconductor element. The insulating film 4012 includes an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen such as silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxide (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride (SiNxOy) (x> y). It can be provided in a single-layer structure or a laminated structure thereof.
For example, when the insulating film 4012 is provided in a two-layer structure, it is preferable to provide a silicon nitride film as the first insulating film and a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film. When the insulating film 4012 is provided in a three-layer structure, a silicon oxide film is provided as the first insulating film, a silicon nitride film is provided as the second insulating film, and oxynitride is provided as the third insulating film. A silicon film may be provided.

The semiconductor layers 4013, 4014, 4015 can be formed of an amorphous semiconductor or a semi-amorphous semiconductor (SAS). Alternatively, a polycrystalline semiconductor layer may be used. SAS has an intermediate structure between amorphous and crystalline structures (including single crystal and polycrystal).
It is a semiconductor having a third state that is stable in free energy, and contains a crystalline region having short-range order and lattice strain. 0.5-20 in at least some areas of the membrane
A crystal region of nm can be observed, and when silicon is the main component, the Raman spectrum is shifted to the lower wavenumber side than ^{520 cm-1.} In X-ray diffraction, diffraction peaks (111) and (220), which are said to be derived from the silicon crystal lattice, are observed. Hydrogen or halogen is included at least 1 atomic% or more as compensation for unbonded hands (dangling bonds). SAS is formed by glow discharge decomposition (plasma CVD) of a material gas. Material gases include SiH ₄ , Si ₂ H ₆ , SiH ₂ Cl ₂ , SiHCl ₃ , and SiC.
It is possible to use l ₄ , SiF _{4, and the like.} Alternatively, GeF ₄ may be mixed. The material gas _{H 2,} or,, _{H 2} and He, Ar, Kr, may be diluted with selected one or more kinds of rare gas elements and Ne. The dilution rate is in the range of 2 to 1000 times. The pressure is approximately 0.
Range from 1Pa to 133Pa, power frequency is 1MHz to 120MHz, preferably 13MH
z to 60 MHz. The substrate heating temperature may be 300 ° C. or lower. Oxygen, as an impurity element in the membrane
Impurities of atmospheric components such as nitrogen and carbon should be 1 x 10 ²⁰ cm ^-1 or less.
In particular, the oxygen concentration is 5 × 10 ¹⁹ / cm ³ or less, preferably 1 × 10 ¹⁹ / cm ³ or less. Here, an amorphous semiconductor layer is formed from a material containing silicon (Si) as a main component (for example, SixGe1-x) by using known means (spatter method, LPCVD method, plasma CVD method, etc.), and the non-crystalline semiconductor layer is formed. The crystalline semiconductor layer is crystallized by a known crystallization method such as a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using an RTA or a furnace annealing furnace, or a thermal crystallization method using a metal element that promotes crystallization.

The insulating film 4016 includes silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), and silicon oxide (Si).
It can be provided by a single-layer structure of an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen such as OxNy) (x> y) and silicon nitride (SiNxOy) (x> y), or a laminated structure thereof.

The gate electrode 4017 may have a single-layer conductive film or a laminated structure of two-layer or three-layer conductive film. A known conductive film can be used as the material of the gate electrode 4017. For example, tantalum (Ta), titanium (Ti), molybdenum (Mo), tungsten (
A single film of an element such as W), chromium (Cr), silicon (Si), a nitride film of the element (typically, a tantalum nitride film, a tungsten nitride film, a titanium nitride film), or a combination of the elements. Alloy film (typically Mo-W alloy, Mo-Ta alloy), or
Silicide film of the element (typically tungsten silicide film, titanium silicide film)
Etc. can be used. The above-mentioned single film, nitride film, alloy film, silicide film and the like may be used as a single layer or may be used in a laminated manner.

The insulating film 4018 is formed of silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxide (SiOxNy) (x> y), silicon nitride (SiNxOy) (SiNxOy) by a known means (spatter method, plasma CVD method, etc.). It can be provided by a single-layer structure of an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen such as x> y), a film containing carbon such as DLC (diamond-like carbon), or a laminated structure thereof.

The insulating film 4019 is made of a siloxane resin, silicon oxide (SiOx), or silicon nitride (Si).
Nx), Silicon Oxide (SiOxNy) (x> y), Silicon Oxide (SiNxOy) (x)
> Y) or other insulating film with oxygen or nitrogen, carbon-containing film such as DLC (diamond-like carbon), or organic materials such as epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinylphenol, benzocyclobutene, and acrylic. , Can be provided in a single layer or laminated structure. The siloxane resin corresponds to a resin containing a Si—O—Si bond. The skeleton structure of siloxane is composed of the bonds of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As the substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as the substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as the substituent. In the display device applicable to the present invention, it is also possible to directly provide the insulating film 4019 so as to cover the gate electrode 4017 without providing the insulating film 4018.

The conductive film 4023 is a simple substance film of an element such as Al, Ni, W, Mo, Ti, Pt, Cu, Ta, Au, Mn, a nitride film of the element, or an alloy film in which the elements are combined. , ► film of the element, and the like can be used. For example, as an alloy containing a plurality of the above elements, an Al alloy containing C and Ti, an Al alloy containing Ni, C and N.
An Al alloy containing i, an Al alloy containing C and Mn, and the like can be used. Also,
When it is provided in a laminated structure, it can be a structure in which Al is sandwiched between Mo or Ti.
By doing so, the resistance of Al to heat and chemical reaction can be improved.

Next, the features of each structure will be described with reference to the cross-sectional views of the transistors having a plurality of different structures shown in FIG. 48 (A).

Since the transistor 4001 is a single drain transistor and can be manufactured by a simple method, there are advantages that the manufacturing cost is low and the yield can be high. Here, the semiconductor layer 4
The impurities in 013 and 4015 are different from each other, and the semiconductor layer 4013 functions as a channel region and the semiconductor layer 4015 functions as a source region and a drain region. By controlling the amount of impurities in this way, the resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled. Further, the electrical connection state between the semiconductor layer and the conductive film 4023 can be brought close to the ohmic connection. In addition, it should be noted.
As a method for forming semiconductor layers having different amounts of impurities, a method of dropping impurities into the semiconductor layer using the gate electrode 4017 as a mask can be used.

The transistor 4002 is a transistor having a taper angle of a certain value or more on the gate electrode 4017, and can be manufactured by a simple method, so that there are advantages that the manufacturing cost is low and the yield can be high. The semiconductor layers 4013, 4014, and 4015 have different impurity concentrations, the semiconductor layer 4013 has a channel region, and the semiconductor layer 4014 has a low concentration drain (Lighttl).
The y Doped Drain (LDD) region and the semiconductor layer 4015 are used as a source region and a drain region. By controlling the amount of impurities in this way, the resistivity of the semiconductor layer can be controlled. Further, the electrical connection state between the semiconductor layer and the conductive film 4023 can be brought close to the ohmic connection. Further, since it has an LDD region, it is difficult for a high electric field to be applied to the inside of the transistor, and deterioration of the element due to hot carriers can be suppressed. As a method for forming semiconductor layers having different amounts of impurities, a method of dropping impurities into the semiconductor layer using the gate electrode 4017 as a mask can be used. Since the gate electrode 4017 of the transistor 4002 has a taper angle, it is possible to give a gradient to the concentration of impurities that pass through the gate electrode 4017 and are dopeed to the semiconductor layer, and an LDD region can be easily formed. can do.

In the transistor 4003, the gate electrode is composed of at least two layers, and the lower gate electrode 4 is formed.
017a is a transistor having a shape longer than that of the upper gate electrode 4017b. In the present specification, the shape of the upper gate electrode and the lower gate electrode is referred to as a hat shape.
The shape of the gate electrode is hat-shaped, so there is no need to add a photomask, and the LDD
Regions can be formed. In addition, a structure in which the LDD region overlaps with the gate electrode, such as the transistor 4003, is particularly a GOLD structure (Gate Overlapped L).
It is called DD). As a method of forming the shape of the gate electrode into a hat shape, the following method may be used.

First, when patterning the gate electrode, the lower gate electrode and the upper gate electrode are etched by dry etching to form a shape with an inclination (taper) on the side surface. Subsequently, it is processed by anisotropic etching so that the inclination of the upper gate electrode becomes close to vertical.
As a result, a gate electrode having a hat-shaped cross section is formed. After that, by doping the impurity element twice, the semiconductor layer 4013 used as the channel region, the semiconductor layer 4014 used as the LDD region, and the semiconductor layer 40 used as the source electrode and the drain electrode are used.
15 is formed.

The LDD region that overlaps with the gate electrode is referred to as a Lov region, and the LDD region that does not overlap with the gate electrode is referred to as a Loff region. Here, the Loff region has a high effect of suppressing the off-current value, but has a low effect of relaxing the electric field in the vicinity of the drain to prevent deterioration of the on-current value due to hot carriers. On the other hand, the Lov region relaxes the electric field near the drain and is effective in preventing deterioration of the on-current value, but the effect of suppressing the off-current value is low. Therefore, it is preferable to manufacture a transistor having a structure according to the required characteristics for each of various circuits. For example, when a display device applicable to the present invention is used as the display device, it is preferable to use a transistor having a Loff region as the pixel transistor in order to suppress the off-current value. On the other hand, as the transistor in the peripheral circuit, it is preferable to use a transistor having a Lov region in order to relax the electric field in the vicinity of the drain and prevent deterioration of the on-current value.

The transistor 4004 is in contact with the side surface of the gate electrode 4017, and the side wall 4021
It is a transistor having. By having the side wall 4021, the region overlapping the side wall 4021 can be set as the LDD region.

Transistor 4005 is LDD by doping the semiconductor layer with a mask.
It is a transistor forming a (Loff) region. By doing so, the LDD region can be reliably formed, and the off-current value of the transistor can be reduced.

Transistor 4006 is LDD by doping the semiconductor layer with a mask.
It is a transistor that forms the (Lov) region. By doing so, the LDD region can be reliably formed, the electric field in the vicinity of the drain of the transistor can be relaxed, and the deterioration of the on-current value can be reduced.

Next, an example of a method for manufacturing a transistor included in the display device according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (B) to 48 (G).

The structure and manufacturing method of the transistor included in the display device according to the present invention is not limited to that shown in FIG. 48, and various structures and manufacturing methods can be used.

In the present embodiment, the substrate 4011, the insulating film 4012, the semiconductor layers 4013, 4014
, 4015, the insulating film 4016, the insulating film 4018, and the insulating film 4019 can be oxidized or nitrided by subjecting the surfaces to oxidation or nitriding using plasma treatment. In this way, the surface of the semiconductor layer or the insulating film is modified by oxidizing or nitriding the semiconductor layer or the insulating film using plasma treatment, and compared with the insulating film formed by the CVD method or the sputtering method. A finer insulating film can be formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress defects such as pinholes and improve the characteristics of the display device.

First, the surface of the substrate 4011 is washed with hydrofluoric acid (HF), alkali or pure water. The substrate 4011 is a glass substrate such as barium borosilicate glass or aluminoborosilicate glass.
A quartz substrate, a ceramic substrate, a metal substrate containing stainless steel, or the like can be used. In addition, a substrate made of a flexible synthetic resin such as acrylic or plastic represented by polyethylene terephthalate (PET), polyethylene naphthalate (PEN), or polyether sulfone (PES) can be used. It can also be used. Here, a case where a glass substrate is used as the substrate 4011 is shown.

Here, the surface of the substrate 4011 is subjected to plasma treatment to be oxidized or nitrided, and the substrate 4011 is oxidized or nitrided.
An oxide film or a nitride film may be formed on the surface of the above (FIG. 48 (B)). An insulating film such as an oxide film or a nitride film formed by subjecting the surface to plasma treatment is also referred to as a plasma-treated insulating film below. In FIG. 48B, the insulating film 4031 is a plasma-treated insulating film. Generally, when a semiconductor element such as a thin film transistor is provided on a substrate such as glass or plastic, an impurity element such as an alkali metal such as Na or an alkaline earth metal contained in the glass or plastic is mixed in the semiconductor element. This may affect the characteristics of the semiconductor element. However, by nitriding the surface of a substrate made of glass, plastic, or the like, it is possible to prevent impurity elements such as alkali metal or alkaline earth metal contained in the substrate from being mixed into the semiconductor element.

When the surface is oxidized by plasma treatment, it is provided in an oxygen atmosphere (for example, oxygen (O _2).
) And a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, Xe), oxygen and hydrogen (H ₂ ) and a rare gas atmosphere, or nitrous oxide and a rare gas atmosphere. )
Perform plasma processing with. On the other hand, when the semiconductor layer is nitrided by plasma treatment, it is in a nitrogen atmosphere (for example, _{containing at least one of nitrogen (N 2} ) and a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), or nitrogen, hydrogen, and a rare gas atmosphere, or subjected to plasma treatment in an NH ₃ a rare gas). As the rare gas, for example, a gas obtained by mixing Ar or Ar and Kr can be used. Therefore, the plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for the plasma treatment. For example, when Ar is used, Ar is contained in the plasma-treated insulating film.

In the plasma treatment, the electron density is 1 × 10 ¹¹ cm ^{-3 in the atmosphere of the gas.}
It is 1 × 10 ¹³ cm ^-3 or less, and the electron temperature of the plasma is 0.5 ev or more and 1.5 ev or less.
It is preferable to treat with the following. This is because the electron density of the plasma is high and the electron temperature in the vicinity of the object to be processed is low, so that damage to the object to be processed by the plasma can be prevented. In addition, since the electron density of plasma is as high as ^{1 × 10 11} cm ^{-3 or more,}
The oxide or nitride film formed by oxidizing or nitriding the irradiated object using plasma treatment has excellent uniformity such as film thickness as compared with the film formed by the CVD method, the sputtering method, or the like.
Moreover, a dense film can be formed. Alternatively, since the electron temperature of the plasma is as low as 1 eV or less, the oxidation or nitriding treatment can be performed at a lower temperature than the conventional plasma treatment or thermal oxidation method. For example, even if the plasma treatment is performed at a temperature 100 degrees or more lower than the strain point temperature of the glass substrate, the oxidation or nitriding treatment can be sufficiently performed. As the frequency for forming the plasma, a high frequency such as a microwave (2.45 GHz) can be used. Unless otherwise specified below, the plasma treatment shall be performed using the above conditions.

Although FIG. 48B shows a case where the plasma-treated insulating film is formed by plasma-treating the surface of the substrate 4011, in the present embodiment, the plasma-treated insulating film is formed on the surface of the substrate 4011. Including the case where it does not form.

Although the plasma-treated insulating film formed by plasma-treating the surface of the object to be treated is not shown in FIGS. 48 (C) to 48 (G), in the present embodiment, the substrate 40
11. The case where a plasma-treated insulating film formed by performing plasma treatment is present on the surface of the insulating film 4012, the semiconductor layers 4013, 4014, 4015, the insulating film 4016, the insulating film 4018, or the insulating film 4019 is also included.

Next, known means (sputtering method, LPCVD method, plasma CVD method, etc.) on the substrate 4011.
The insulating film 4012 is formed using the above (FIG. 48 (C)). As the insulating film 4012, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon oxide (SiOxNy) (x> y) can be used.

Here, the surface of the insulating film 4012 may be subjected to plasma treatment, and the insulating film 4012 may be oxidized or nitrided to form a plasma-treated insulating film on the surface of the insulating film 4012. By oxidizing the surface of the insulating film 4012, the surface of the insulating film 4012 can be modified to obtain a dense film having few defects such as pinholes. Further, since the plasma-treated insulating film having a low N atom content can be formed by oxidizing the surface of the insulating film 4012, the plasma-treated insulating film and the semiconductor are provided when the semiconductor layer is provided in the plasma-treated insulating film. The layer interface characteristics are improved. The plasma-treated insulating film is a rare gas (He, Ne, Ar, which was used for plasma treatment.
Includes at least one of Kr and Xe). The plasma treatment can be carried out in the same manner under the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, island-shaped semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014 are formed on the insulating film 4012 (FIG. 48 (D)).
). The island-shaped semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014 are made of a material (Si) as a main component on the insulating film 4012 by using known means (sputtering method, LPCVD method, plasma CVD method, etc.).
For example, it can be provided by forming an amorphous semiconductor layer using SixGe1-x or the like, crystallizing the amorphous semiconductor layer, and selectively etching the semiconductor layer. In addition, it should be noted.
Crystallization of the amorphous semiconductor layer includes a laser crystallization method, a thermal crystallization method using an RTA or a furnace annealing furnace, a thermal crystallization method using a metal element that promotes crystallization, or a method combining these methods. It can be carried out by the known crystallization method of. Here, the ends of the island-shaped semiconductor layer are provided in a shape close to a right angle (θ = 85 to 100 °). Alternatively, the semiconductor layer 4014, which is a low-concentration drain region, may be formed by dropping impurities using a mask.

Here, the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014 are subjected to plasma treatment, and the semiconductor layers 4013,
A plasma-treated insulating film may be formed on the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014 by oxidizing or nitriding the surface of 4014. For example, Si as semiconductor layers 4013, 4014
When is used, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiN) is used as the plasma-treated insulating film.
x) is formed. Alternatively, the semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014 may be oxidized by plasma treatment and then nitrided by performing plasma treatment again. In this case, silicon oxide (SiOx) is formed in contact with the semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014, and silicon nitride oxide (SiNxOy) (x> y) is formed on the surface of the silicon oxide. When the semiconductor layer is oxidized by plasma treatment, it should be noted that in an oxygen atmosphere (for example, oxygen (O ₂ )) and a rare gas (He, Ne, A).
Plasma treatment is performed in an atmosphere (including at least one of r, Kr, and Xe), or in an oxygen, hydrogen (H ₂ ), and rare gas atmosphere, or in a nitrous oxide and rare gas atmosphere). On the other hand, when the semiconductor layer is nitrided by plasma treatment, it is in a nitrogen atmosphere (for example, _{containing at least one of nitrogen (N 2} ) and a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe), or Plasma treatment is performed in a nitrogen, hydrogen, and rare gas atmosphere or NH3 and a rare gas atmosphere). As the rare gas, for example, Ar can be used. Alternatively, a gas in which Ar and Kr are mixed may be used. Therefore, the plasma-treated insulating film is a rare gas (He, Ne) used for plasma treatment.
, Ar, Kr, Xe). For example, when Ar is used, Ar is contained in the plasma-treated insulating film.

Next, the insulating film 4016 is formed (FIG. 48 (E)). The insulating film 4016 uses known means (spatter method, LPCVD method, plasma CVD method, etc.) to form silicon oxide (SiOx), silicon nitride (SiNx), silicon oxide (SiOxNy) (x> y), and oxidation nitride. Silicon (SiNx)
It can be provided by a single-layer structure of an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen such as Oy) (x> y) or a laminated structure thereof. When the plasma-treated insulating film is formed on the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014 by plasma-treating the surfaces of the semiconductor layers 4013 and 4014,
It is also possible to use the plasma-treated insulating film as the insulating film 4016.

Here, the surface of the insulating film 4016 may be subjected to plasma treatment, and the surface of the insulating film 4016 may be oxidized or nitrided to form a plasma-treated insulating film on the surface of the insulating film 4016.
The plasma-treated insulating film is a rare gas (He, Ne, Ar, Kr, which was used for plasma treatment.
Includes at least one of Xe). Moreover, the plasma treatment can be carried out in the same manner under the above-mentioned conditions.

Alternatively, the insulating film 4016 may be oxidized by once performing plasma treatment in an oxygen atmosphere, and then nitriding by performing plasma treatment again in a nitrogen atmosphere. In this way, by performing plasma treatment on the insulating film 4016 and oxidizing or nitriding the surface of the insulating film 4016, the surface of the insulating film 4016 can be modified to form a dense film. Since the insulating film obtained by performing the plasma treatment is denser and has less defects such as pinholes as compared with the insulating film formed by the CVD method or the sputtering method, the characteristics of the thin film transistor can be improved.

Next, the gate electrode 4017 is formed (FIG. 48 (F)). The gate electrode 4017 can be formed by using known means (sputtering method, LPCVD method, plasma CVD method, etc.).

In the transistor 4001, the semiconductor layer 4015 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed by performing impurity doping after forming the gate electrode 4017.

In the transistor 4002, the 4014 used as the LDD region and the semiconductor layer 4015 used as the semiconductor layer 4013, the source region and the drain region can be formed by performing impurity dropping after forming the gate electrode 4017.

In the transistor 4003, 4014 used as the LDD region and the semiconductor layer 4013 are formed by forming the gate electrodes 4017a and 4017b and then performing impurity dropping.
, A semiconductor layer 4015 used as a source region and a drain region can be formed.

In the transistor 4004, the side wall 4021 is on the side surface of the gate electrode 4017.
4014, which is used as the LDD region, by performing impurity doping after forming
The semiconductor layer 4013, the semiconductor layer 4015 used as the source region and the drain region can be formed.

As the side wall 4021, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) can be used. As a method of forming the side wall 4021 on the side surface of the gate electrode 4017, for example, after forming the gate electrode 4017, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) is formed by a known method, and then anisotropic. Silicon oxide by sex etching (
A method of etching a SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) film can be used. By doing so, silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (S) is formed only on the side surface of the gate electrode 4017.
Since the iNx) film can be left, the side wall 402 is on the side surface of the gate electrode 4017.
1 can be formed.

In the transistor 4005, a mask 4022 is formed so as to cover the gate electrode 4017, and then impurity dropping is performed to use the transistor 4005 as an LDD (Loff) region 40.
14, semiconductor layer 4013, semiconductor layer 4015 used as a source region and a drain region
Can be formed.

In the transistor 4006, 4014 used as the LDD (Lov) region and the semiconductor layer 4015 used as the semiconductor layer 4013, the source region and the drain region can be formed by performing impurity dropping after forming the gate electrode 4017. it can.

Next, the insulating film 4018 is formed (FIG. 48 (G)). The insulating film 4018 is made of silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) by a known means (sputtering method, plasma CVD method, etc.).
, Silicon Nitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), Silicon Nitride (SiNxOy) (x> y)
It can be provided by a single-layer structure of an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen such as, a film containing carbon such as DLC (diamond-like carbon), or a laminated structure thereof.

Here, the surface of the insulating film 4018 may be subjected to plasma treatment, and the surface of the insulating film 4018 may be oxidized or nitrided to form a plasma-treated insulating film on the surface of the insulating film 4018.
The plasma-treated insulating film is a rare gas (He, Ne, Ar, Kr, which was used for plasma treatment.
Includes at least one of Xe). Moreover, the plasma treatment can be carried out in the same manner under the above-mentioned conditions.

Next, the insulating film 4019 is formed (FIG. 48 (A)). The insulating film 4019 is made of silicon oxide (SiOx) or silicon nitride (SiNx) by a known means (sputtering method, plasma CVD method, etc.).
, Silicon Nitride (SiOxNy) (x> y), Silicon Nitride (SiNxOy) (x> y)
In addition to being able to use an insulating film having oxygen or nitrogen such as, or a film containing carbon such as DLC (diamond-like carbon), epoxy, polyimide, polyamide, polyvinylphenol, benzocyclobutene, acrylic and the like can be used. It can be provided with a single-layer structure of an organic material or a siloxane resin, or a laminated structure thereof. The siloxane resin corresponds to a resin containing a Si—O—Si bond. The skeleton structure of siloxane is composed of the bonds of silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As the substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aryl group) is used. A fluoro group can also be used as the substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as the substituent. Further, the plasma-treated insulating film contains a rare gas (including at least one of He, Ne, Ar, Kr, and Xe) used for plasma treatment. For example, when Ar is used, plasma-treated insulating film is used. Ar is contained in the film.

When an organic material such as polyimide, polyamide, polyvinylphenol, benzocyclobutene, or acrylic or a siloxane resin is used as the insulating film 4019, the insulating film is oxidized or nitrided by plasma treatment on the surface of the insulating film 4019. The surface of the can be modified. By modifying the surface, the strength of the insulating film 4019 is improved, and it is possible to reduce physical damage such as crack generation during opening formation and film loss during etching. Further, by modifying the surface of the insulating film 4019, the adhesion to the conductive film is improved when the conductive film 4023 is formed on the insulating film 4019. For example, when nitriding is performed using a siloxane resin as the insulating film 4019 by plasma treatment, the surface of the siloxane resin is nitrided to form a plasma-treated insulating film containing nitrogen or a rare gas, and the physical strength is increased. improves.

Next, in order to form the conductive film 4023 electrically connected to the semiconductor layer 4015, the insulating film 4
Contact holes are formed in 019, the insulating film 4018, and the insulating film 4016. The shape of the contact hole may be tapered, and by making such a shape, the conductive film 4
The coverage of 023 can be improved.

FIG. 49 shows the cross-sectional structure of the bottom gate type transistor and the cross-sectional structure of the capacitive element.

A first insulating film (insulating film 4102) is formed on the entire surface of the substrate 4101. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the characteristics of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film has a function as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. As the first insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

A first conductive layer (conductive layer 4103 and conductive layer 4104) is formed on the first insulating film. The conductive layer 4103 includes a portion that functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 4120.
The conductive layer 4104 includes a portion that functions as a first electrode of the capacitive element 4121. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, and P.
t, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 4122) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film has a function as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

It is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film of the portion in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface where the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film are in contact with each other is reduced.

When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in the portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A semiconductor layer is formed on a part of the portion of the second insulating film that overlaps with the first conductive layer by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like. Then, a part of the semiconductor layer is extended to a portion on the second insulating film that is not formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer has a channel forming region (channel forming region 4110).
), LDD region (LDD region 4108, LDD region 4109), and impurity region (impurity region 4105, impurity region 4106, impurity region 4107). The channel forming region 4110 functions as a channel forming region of the transistor 4120. The LDD region 4108 and the LDD region 4109 function as the LDD region of the transistor 4120. The LDD area 4108 and the LDD area 4109 are not always necessary. The impurity region 4105 includes a portion that functions as one of a source region and a drain region of the transistor 4120. The impurity region 4106 includes a portion that functions as the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 4120. The impurity region 4107 includes a portion that functions as a second electrode of the capacitive element 4121.

A third insulating film (insulating film 4111) is formed on the entire surface. A part of the third insulating film is
Contact holes are selectively formed. The insulating film 4111 has a function as an interlayer film. The third insulating film is an inorganic material (silicon oxide, silicon nitride, silicon oxide, etc.) or an organic compound material having a low dielectric constant (photosensitive or non-photosensitive organic resin material).
Etc. can be used. Alternatively, a material containing siloxane can also be used. Siloxane is a material whose skeletal structure is composed of a bond between silicon (Si) and oxygen (O). As a substituent, an organic group containing at least hydrogen (for example, an alkyl group or an aryl group)
Is used. Alternatively, a fluoro group may be used as the substituent. Alternatively, an organic group containing at least hydrogen and a fluoro group may be used as the substituent.

A second conductive layer (conductive layer 4112) is formed on the third insulating film. Conductive layer 4112
Is connected to the other of the source region and the drain region of the transistor 4120 via a contact hole formed in the third insulating film. Therefore, the conductive layer 4112 includes a portion that functions as the other of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 4120. In addition, it should be noted.
The second conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au,
Pt, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

As a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

Next, the structure of the transistor and the capacitive element when an amorphous silicon (a—Si: H) film is used for the semiconductor layer of the transistor will be described.

FIG. 50 shows the cross-sectional structure of the top gate type transistor and the cross-sectional structure of the capacitive element.

A first insulating film (insulating film 4202) is formed on the entire surface of the substrate 4201. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film has a function as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. As the first insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

It is not always necessary to form the first insulating film. In this case, the number of steps can be reduced. Manufacturing costs can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

On the first insulating film, the first conductive layer (conductive layer 4203, conductive layer 4204 and conductive layer 4205)
) Is formed. The conductive layer 4203 includes a portion that functions as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 4220. The conductive layer 4204 is a transistor 422.
Includes a portion that functions as the other electrode of the zero source electrode and the drain electrode. Conductive layer 420
Reference numeral 5 denotes a portion that functions as a first electrode of the capacitive element 4221. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Si, and Z.
n, Fe, Ba, Ge and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 4206 and semiconductor layer 4207) is formed on the conductive layer 4203 and the conductive layer 4204. The semiconductor layer 4206 includes a portion that functions as one electrode of the source region and the drain region. The semiconductor layer 4207 includes a portion that functions as the other electrode of the source region and the drain region. As the first semiconductor layer, silicon or the like containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

A second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 4208) is formed between the conductive layer 4203 and the conductive layer 4204 and on the first insulating film. A part of the semiconductor layer 4208 is extended onto the conductive layer 4203 and the conductive layer 4204. The semiconductor layer 4208 includes a portion that functions as a channel region of the transistor 4220. The second semiconductor layer is
A non-crystalline semiconductor layer such as amorphous silicon (a-Si: H), a semiconductor layer such as microcrystalline semiconductor (μ-Si: H), or the like can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 4) so as to cover at least the semiconductor layer 4208 and the conductive layer 4205.
209 and the insulating film 4210) are formed. The second insulating film has a function as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

It is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film of the portion in contact with the second semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface where the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film are in contact with each other is reduced.

When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in the portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A second conductive layer (conductive layer 4211 and conductive layer 4212) is formed on the second insulating film. The conductive layer 4211 includes a portion that functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 4220.
The conductive layer 4212 has a function as a second electrode or wiring of the capacitive element 4221. The second conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, and A.
u, Pt, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

As a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

FIG. 51 shows the cross-sectional structure of the inverted stagger type (bottom gate type) transistor and the cross-sectional structure of the capacitive element. In particular, the transistor shown in FIG. 51 has a structure called a channel etch type.

A first insulating film (insulating film 4302) is formed on the entire surface of the substrate 4301. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film has a function as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. As the first insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

It is not always necessary to form the first insulating film. In this case, the number of steps can be reduced. Manufacturing costs can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (conductive layer 4303 and conductive layer 4304) is formed on the first insulating film. The conductive layer 4303 includes a portion that functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 4320.
The conductive layer 4304 includes a portion that functions as a first electrode of the capacitive element 4321. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, TB, Cr, W, Bl, Nd, Cu, Bg, Bu, and P.
t, NA-Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 4302) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film has a function as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

It is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film of the portion in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface where the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film are in contact with each other is reduced.

When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in the portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 43) is formed on a part of the second insulating film that overlaps with the first conductive layer by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
06) is formed. A part of the semiconductor layer 4306 is extended to a portion of the second insulating film that does not overlap with the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer 4306 is
A portion that functions as a channel region of the transistor 4320 is included. The semiconductor layer 430
As 6, a semiconductor layer having non-crystallinity such as amorphous silicon (A—Si: H), a semiconductor layer such as microcrystalline semiconductor (μ—Si: H), or the like can be used.

A second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 4307 and semiconductor layer 4308) is partly on the first semiconductor layer.
Is formed. The semiconductor layer 4307 includes a portion that functions as one electrode of the source region and the drain region. The semiconductor layer 4308 includes a portion that functions as the other electrode of the source region and the drain region. As the second conductor layer, silicon or the like containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

On the second semiconductor layer and the second insulating film, the second conductive layer (conductive layer 4309, conductive layer 431).
0 and the conductive layer 4311) are formed. The conductive layer 4309 includes a portion that functions as one of the source electrode and the drain electrode of the transistor 4320. The conductive layer 4310 includes a portion that functions as the other side of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 4320. Conductive layer 431
Reference numeral 2 includes a portion that functions as a second electrode of the capacitive element 4321. The second conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Si, and Z.
n, Fe, Ba, Ge and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

As a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

Here, an example of a process characterized by a channel etch type transistor will be described. The same mask can be used to form the first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer. In particular,
The first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are continuously formed. Then, the first semiconductor layer and the second semiconductor layer are formed by using the same mask.

Another example of the process characterized by the channel etch type transistor will be described. The channel region of the transistor can be formed without using a new mask. In particular,
After the second conductive layer is formed, a part of the second semiconductor layer is removed by using the second conductive layer as a mask. Alternatively, a part of the second semiconductor layer is removed using the same mask as the second conductive layer. Then, the first semiconductor layer formed below the removed second semiconductor layer becomes the channel region of the transistor.

FIG. 52 shows the cross-sectional structure of the inverted stagger type (bottom gate type) transistor and the cross-sectional structure of the capacitive element. In particular, the transistor shown in FIG. 52 has a structure called a channel protection type (channel stop type).

A first insulating film (insulating film 4402) is formed on the entire surface of the substrate 4401. The first insulating film has a function of preventing impurities from the substrate side from affecting the semiconductor layer and changing the properties of the transistor. That is, the first insulating film has a function as a base film. Therefore, a highly reliable transistor can be manufactured. As the first insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

It is not always necessary to form the first insulating film. In this case, the number of steps can be reduced. Manufacturing costs can be reduced. Since the structure can be simplified, the yield can be improved.

A first conductive layer (conductive layer 4403 and conductive layer 4404) is formed on the first insulating film. The conductive layer 4403 includes a portion that functions as a gate electrode of the transistor 4420.
The conductive layer 4404 includes a portion that functions as a first electrode of the capacitive element 4421. The first conductive layer includes Ti, Mo, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, and P.
t, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, Ge and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

A second insulating film (insulating film 4402) is formed so as to cover at least the first conductive layer. The second insulating film has a function as a gate insulating film. As the second insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

It is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film of the portion in contact with the semiconductor layer. This is because the trap level at the interface where the semiconductor layer and the second insulating film are in contact with each other is reduced.

When the second insulating film is in contact with Mo, it is desirable to use a silicon oxide film as the second insulating film in the portion in contact with Mo. This is because the silicon oxide film does not oxidize Mo.

A first semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 44) is formed on a part of the second insulating film that overlaps with the first conductive layer by a photolithography method, an inkjet method, a printing method, or the like.
06) is formed. Then, a part of the semiconductor layer 4406 is extended to a portion on the second insulating film that is not formed so as to overlap with the first conductive layer. The semiconductor layer 4406 is
A portion that functions as a channel region of the transistor 4420 is included. The semiconductor layer 440
As 6, a semiconductor layer having non-crystallinity such as amorphous silicon (C—Si: H), a semiconductor layer such as microcrystalline semiconductor (μ—Si: H), or the like can be used.

A third insulating film (insulating film 4412) is formed on a part of the first semiconductor layer. The insulating film 4412 has a function of preventing the channel region of the transistor 4420 from being removed by etching. That is, the insulating film 4412 functions as a channel protective film (channel stop film). As the third insulating film, a single layer such as a silicon oxide film, a silicon nitride film or a silicon nitride nitride film (SiOxNy), or a laminate thereof can be used.

A second semiconductor layer (semiconductor layer 440) is formed on a part on the first semiconductor layer and a part on the third insulating film.
7 and the semiconductor layer 4408) are formed. The semiconductor layer 4407 includes a portion that functions as one electrode of the source region and the drain region. The semiconductor layer 4408 includes a portion that functions as the other electrode of the source region and the drain region. As the second conductor layer, silicon or the like containing phosphorus or the like can be used.

On the second semiconductor layer, the second conductive layer (conductive layer 4409, conductive layer 4410 and conductive layer 441)
1) is formed. The conductive layer 4409 includes a portion that functions as one of a source electrode and a drain electrode of the transistor 4420. The conductive layer 4410 includes a portion that functions as the other side of the source and drain electrodes of the transistor 4420. The conductive layer 4411 is a capacitive element 44.
21 includes a portion that functions as a second electrode. The second conductive layer includes Ti and Mo.
, Ta, Cr, W, Al, Nd, Cu, Ag, Au, Pt, Si, Zn, Fe, Ba, G
e and the like, or alloys thereof can be used. Alternatively, a laminate of these elements (including alloys) can be used.

As a step after the second conductive layer is formed, various insulating films or various conductive films may be formed.

Here, an example of a process characterized by a channel protection type transistor will be described. The same mask can be used to form the first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer and the second conductive layer.
At the same time, a channel region can be formed. Specifically, a first semiconductor layer is formed to form a film,
Next, a third insulating film (channel protective film, channel stop film) is formed using a mask.
Next, the second semiconductor layer and the second conductive layer are continuously formed into a film. Then, after the second conductive layer is formed, the first semiconductor layer, the second semiconductor layer, and the second conductive layer are formed by using the same mask. However, the first semiconductor layer below the third insulating film is protected by the third insulating film and is not removed by etching. This portion (the portion of the first semiconductor layer on which the third insulating film is formed) serves as a channel region.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied and combined with the content (which may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and the embodiment. , Or can be replaced freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment and the example with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments and examples are used.
An example when it is embodied, an example when it is slightly deformed, an example when it is partially changed, an example when it is improved, an example when it is described in detail, an example when it is applied, and an example about related parts. And so on. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments and examples can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiment.

(Embodiment 12)
In the present embodiment, an example of the electronic device according to the present invention will be described.

FIG. 53 shows one form of a display panel module in which the display panel 4501 and the circuit board 4502 are combined.

As shown in FIG. 53, the display panel 4501 has a pixel unit 4503 and a scanning line drive circuit 4504.
It also has a signal line drive circuit 4505. For example, a control circuit 4506 and a signal division circuit 4507 are formed on the circuit board 4502. Display panel 450
1 and the circuit board 4502 are connected by a connection wiring 4508. FPC or the like can be used for the connection wiring 4508.

The display panel 4501 integrally forms a pixel portion and a part of peripheral drive circuits (a drive circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of drive circuits) on a substrate by using transistors, and another peripheral drive circuit (a plurality of drive circuits). Of these, a drive circuit having a high operating frequency) may be formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 3410 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to a glass substrate using a TAB (Tape Auto Bonding) or a printed circuit board. Further, all peripheral drive circuits may be formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip may be mounted on a display panel by COG or the like.

As the pixel portion, the pixels described in the above-described embodiment are used. According to the present invention, the viewing angle can be improved. Further, it is possible to reduce the cost by using the same conductive type transistor for the transistor constituting the pixel portion and the amorphous semiconductor for the semiconductor layer of the transistor.

A television receiver can be completed by such a display module. FIG. 54 shows
It is a block diagram which shows the main composition of a television receiver. Tuner 4601 receives video and audio signals. The video signal includes a video signal amplifier circuit 4602, a video signal processing circuit 4603 that converts the signal output from the amplifier into a color signal corresponding to each color of red, green, and blue, and the video signal to the input specifications of the drive circuit. It is processed by the control circuit 4506 for conversion.
The control circuit 4506 outputs signals to the scanning line side and the signal line side, respectively. In the case of digital drive, a signal division circuit 4507 is provided on the signal line side, and m input digital signals (
m may be divided into positive integers) and supplied.

Of the signals received by the tuner 4601, the audio signal is sent to the audio signal amplification circuit 4604, and the output thereof is supplied to the speaker 4606 via the audio signal processing circuit 4605. The control circuit 4607 receives control information of the receiving station (reception frequency) and the volume from the input unit 4608, and sends a signal to the tuner 4601 and the audio signal processing circuit 4605.

A television receiver incorporating a display panel module having a form different from that of FIG. 54 is shown in FIG. 55 (
Shown in A). In FIG. 55 (A), the display screen 4702 housed in the housing 4701 is
It is formed by a display panel module. The speaker 4703 and the operation switch 4704
Etc. may be provided as appropriate.

FIG. 55 (B) shows a television receiver that can carry only the display wirelessly.
A battery and a signal receiver are built in the housing 4712, and the display unit 4713 or the speaker unit 4717 is driven by the battery. The battery can be recharged repeatedly with the charger 4710. The charger 4710 can transmit and receive a video signal, and the video signal can be transmitted to the signal receiver of the display. The housing 4712 is controlled by the operation key 4716. Alternatively, the device shown in FIG. 55B may be a video / audio bidirectional communication device capable of sending a signal from the housing 4712 to the charger 4710 by operating the operation key 4716. Alternatively, by operating the operation key 4716, a signal is sent from the housing 4712 to the charger 4710, and further, by causing another electronic device to receive a signal that can be transmitted by the charger 4710, communication control of the other electronic device is also possible. It may be a general-purpose remote control device that is possible. The present invention can be applied to the display unit 4713.

FIG. 56A shows a module in which the display panel 4801 and the printed wiring board 4802 are combined. The display panel 4801 includes a pixel unit 4803 provided with a plurality of pixels and a pixel unit 4803.
It has a first scan line drive circuit 4804, a second scan line drive circuit 4805, and a signal line drive circuit 4806 that supplies a video signal to selected pixels.

The printed wiring board 4802 includes a controller 4807 and a central processing unit (CPU) 480.
8. Memory 4809, power supply circuit 4810, audio processing circuit 4811 and transmission / reception circuit 4812
Etc. are provided. The printed wiring board 4802 and the display panel 4801 are connected by a flexible wiring board (FPC) 4813. Flexible Wiring Board (FPC)
The 4813 is provided with a holding capacity, a buffer circuit, etc. to generate noise in the power supply voltage or signal.
And it may be configured to prevent an increase in the rise time of the signal. The controller 4807
, Audio processing circuit 4811, memory 4809, central processing unit (CPU) 4808, power supply circuit 4810, etc., display panel 480 using COG (Chip On Glass) method.
It can also be implemented in 1. The scale of the printed wiring board 4802 can be reduced by the COG method.

Input / output of various control signals is performed via the interface (I / F) unit 4814 provided on the printed wiring board 4802. An antenna port 4815 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the antenna is provided on the printed wiring board 4802.

FIG. 56B shows a block diagram of the module shown in FIG. 56A. This module has VRAM4816, DRAM4817, and flash memory 48 as memory 4809.
18 and the like are included. The image data to be displayed on the panel is stored in the VRAM4816.
Image data or audio data is stored in AM4817, and various programs are stored in the flash memory.

The power supply circuit 4810 includes a display panel 4801, a controller 4807, and a central processing unit (CP).
U) Power is supplied to operate the 4808, the voice processing circuit 4811, the memory 4809, and the transmission / reception circuit 4812. However, depending on the specifications of the panel, the power supply circuit 4810 may be provided with a current source.

The central processing unit (CPU) 4808 includes a control signal generation circuit 4820, a decoder 4821, a register 4822, an arithmetic circuit 4823, a RAM 4824, and a central processing unit (CPU) 4808.
It has an interface (I / F) unit 4819 and the like. Interface (I /
Various signals input to the central processing unit (CPU) 4808 via the F) unit 4819 are once held in the register 4822 and then input to the arithmetic circuit 4823, the decoder 4821, and the like. The arithmetic circuit 4823 performs an arithmetic operation based on the input signal, and specifies a place to send various instructions. On the other hand, the signal input to the decoder 4821 is decoded, and the control signal generation circuit 4
It is input to 820. The control signal generation circuit 4820 generates signals including various instructions based on the input signal, and generates a signal including various instructions at a location specified by the arithmetic circuit 4823, specifically, a memory 480.
9. Send to the transmission / reception circuit 4812, voice processing circuit 4811, controller 4807, and the like.

The memory 4809, the transmission / reception circuit 4812, the voice processing circuit 4811, and the controller 4807 each operate according to the received instructions. The operation will be briefly described below.

The signal input from the input means 4825 is sent to the central processing unit (CPU) 4808 mounted on the printed wiring board 4802 via the interface (I / F) unit 4814.
The control signal generation circuit 4820 is an input means 4 such as a pointing device or a keyboard.
According to the signal sent from the 825, the image data stored in the VRAM 4816 is converted into a predetermined format and sent to the controller 4807.

The controller 4807 performs data processing on the signal including the image data sent from the central processing unit (CPU) 4808 according to the specifications of the panel, and supplies the signal to the display panel 4801. The controller 4807 is based on the power supply voltage input from the power supply circuit 4810 or various signals input from the central processing unit (CPU) 4808, and the Hsync signal, Vsync signal, clock signal CLK, AC voltage (AC Cont), and so on. Generates a switching signal L / R and
It supplies to the display panel 4801.

In the transmission / reception circuit 4812, signals transmitted / received as radio waves are processed by the antenna 4828. Specifically, an isolator, a bandpass filter, and a VCO (Voltage) are processed.
Controlled Oscillator), LPF (Low Pass Filter)
It may include high frequency circuits such as er), couplers and baluns. Among the signals transmitted and received in the transmission / reception circuit 4812, a signal including voice information is sent to the voice processing circuit 4811 according to a command from the central processing unit (CPU) 4808.

The signal including the audio information transmitted according to the instruction of the central processing unit (CPU) 4808 is demodulated into an audio signal in the audio processing circuit 4811 and sent to the speaker 4827. The audio signal sent from the microphone 4826 is modulated by the audio processing circuit 4811 and sent to the transmission / reception circuit 4812 according to an instruction from the central processing unit (CPU) 4808.

The controller 4807, the central processing unit (CPU) 4808, the power supply circuit 4810, the audio processing circuit 4811, and the memory 4809 can be implemented as the package of this embodiment.

Of course, this embodiment is not limited to a television receiver, and is used for various purposes such as a personal computer monitor, an information display board at a railway station or an airport, an advertisement display board on a street, and the like, as a display medium having a particularly large area. Can be applied.

Next, a configuration example of the mobile phone according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

The display panel 4901 is detachably incorporated into the housing 4930. Housing 493
The shape or dimensions of 0 can be appropriately changed according to the size of the display panel 4901. The housing 4930 to which the display panel 4901 is fixed is fitted into the printed circuit board 4931 and assembled as a module.

The display panel 4901 is connected to the printed circuit board 4931 via the FPC 4913. The printed circuit board 4931 includes a speaker 4932, a microphone 4933, and a transmission / reception circuit 49.
A signal processing circuit 4935 including 34, a CPU, a controller, and the like is formed. By combining such a module with the input means 4936 and the battery 4937, the housing 493
Store in 9. The pixel portion of the display panel 4901 is arranged so as to be visible from the opening window formed in the housing 4939.

In the display panel 4901, a pixel portion and a part of peripheral drive circuits (a drive circuit having a low operating frequency among a plurality of drive circuits) are integrally formed on a substrate by using transistors, and a part of the peripheral drive circuits (a plurality of drives) are integrally formed. A drive circuit having a high operating frequency among the circuits) may be formed on an IC chip, and the IC chip may be mounted on the display panel 4901 by COG (Chip On Glass). Alternatively, the IC chip may be connected to a glass substrate using a TAB (Tape Auto Bonding) or a printed circuit board. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the power consumption of the display device and prolong the usage time by charging the mobile phone once. The cost of mobile phones can be reduced.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 57 has a function of displaying various information (still image, moving image, text image, etc.). It has a function to display a calendar, date, time, etc. on the display unit. It has a function to operate or edit the information displayed on the display unit. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has a wireless communication function. It has a function to talk with other mobile phones, landlines, or voice communication devices by using the wireless communication function. It has a function to connect to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function to transmit or receive various data using a wireless communication function. It has a function to operate the vibrator in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. The functions of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 57 are not limited to this.
It can have various functions.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 58 includes a main body (A) 5001 equipped with operation switches 5004, a microphone 5005, and the like, a display panel (A) 5008, and a display panel (B) 5009.
, The main body (B) 5002 provided with the speaker 5006 and the like is connected by a hinge 5010 so as to be openable and closable. The display panel (A) 5008 and the display panel (B) 5009 are housed together with the circuit board 5007 in the housing 5003 of the main body (B) 5002. Display panel (A
) 5008 and the pixel portion of the display panel (B) 5009 are arranged so as to be visible from the opening window formed in the housing 5003.

The display panel (A) 5008 and the display panel (B) 5009 can appropriately set specifications such as the number of pixels according to the function of the mobile phone 5000. For example, display panel (A) 5
008 can be used as the main screen, and the display panel (B) 5009 can be used as the sub screen.

The mobile phone according to the present embodiment can be transformed into various modes depending on its function or use. For example, an image sensor may be incorporated in the portion of the hinge 5010 to form a mobile phone with a camera. Operation switches 5004, display panel (A) 5008, display panel (B) 500
Even if the 9 is housed in one housing, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained. Even if the configuration of the present embodiment is applied to an information display terminal provided with a plurality of display units, the same effect can be obtained.

The mobile phone shown in FIG. 58 has a function of displaying various information (still image, moving image, text image, etc.). It has a function to display a calendar, date, time, etc. on the display unit. It has a function to operate or edit the information displayed on the display unit. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has a wireless communication function. It has a function to talk with other mobile phones, landlines, or voice communication devices by using the wireless communication function. It has a function to connect to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function to transmit or receive various data using a wireless communication function. It has a function to operate the vibrator in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. It has a function to generate a sound in response to an incoming call, data reception, or an alarm. The functions of the mobile phone shown in FIG. 58 are not limited to this.
It can have various functions.

The present invention can be applied to various electronic devices. Specifically, it can be applied to the display unit of an electronic device. Such electronic devices include video cameras, digital cameras, goggle-type displays, navigation systems, sound playback devices (car audio, audio components, etc.), computers, game devices, and personal digital assistants (mobile computers, mobile phones, portable games, etc.). An image playback device (specifically, D) equipped with a machine or electronic book, etc., and a recording medium.
A device provided with a display capable of reproducing a recording medium such as an ultimate Versail Disc (DVD) and displaying the image) and the like.

FIG. 59A is a display, which includes a housing 5111, a support base 5112, a display unit 5113, and the like. The display shown in FIG. 59 (A) has a function of displaying various information (still image, moving image, text image, etc.) on the display unit. The function of the display shown in FIG. 59 (A) is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 59B is a camera, which includes a main body 5121, a display unit 5122, an image receiving unit 5123, an operation key 5124, an external connection port 5125, a shutter button 5126, and the like. FIG. 59 (B
) Has a function of capturing a still image. It has a function to shoot moving images. It has a function to automatically correct captured images (still images, moving images). It has a function to save the captured image in a recording medium (external or built in a digital camera). It has a function to display the captured image on the display unit. The function of the camera shown in FIG. 59 (B) is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 59C shows a computer, which includes a main body 5131, a housing 5132, a display unit 5133, a keyboard 5134, an external connection port 5135, a pointing device 5136, and the like. The computer shown in FIG. 59 (C) has various information (still images, moving images, text images, etc.).
Has a function of displaying on the display unit. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has communication functions such as wireless communication or wired communication. It has a function to connect to various computer networks using a communication function. It has a function to transmit or receive various data using a communication function. The functions of the computer shown in FIG. 59 (C) are not limited to this, and various functions can be provided.

FIG. 59 (D) is a mobile computer, which includes a main body 5141, a display unit 5142, a switch 5143, an operation key 5144, an infrared port 5145, and the like. The mobile computer shown in FIG. 59 (D) has a function of displaying various information (still image, moving image, text image, etc.) on the display unit. The display unit has a touch panel function. The display unit has a function to display a calendar, a date, a time, and the like. It has a function to control processing by various software (programs). It has a wireless communication function. It has a function to connect to various computer networks using a wireless communication function. It has a function to transmit or receive various data using a wireless communication function. The function of the mobile computer shown in FIG. 59 (D) is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 59 (E) shows a portable image playback device (for example, a DVD playback device) including a recording medium, which includes a main body 5151, a housing 5152, a display unit A5153, a display unit B5154, and a recording medium (
DVD, etc.) Includes a reading unit 5155, operation keys 5156, speaker unit 5157, and the like. The display unit A5153 can mainly display image information, and the display unit B5154 can mainly display character information.

FIG. 59F is a goggle type display, which includes a main body 5161, a display unit 5162, earphones 5163, and a support unit 5164. The goggle-type display shown in FIG. 59 (F) has a function of displaying an image (still image, moving image, text image, etc.) acquired from the outside on the display unit. The function of the goggle type display shown in FIG. 59 (F) is not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 59 (G) shows a portable game machine, which includes a housing 5171, a display unit 5172, and a speaker unit 51.
73, an operation key 5174, a storage medium insertion unit 5175, and the like are included. A portable game machine using the display device of the present invention for the display unit 5172 can express vivid colors. FIG. 59 (G)
The portable game machine shown in (1) has a function of reading a program or data recorded on a recording medium and displaying it on a display unit. It has a function to share information by wirelessly communicating with other portable game machines. The functions of the portable game machine shown in FIG. 59 (G) are not limited to this, and can have various functions.

FIG. 59 (H) shows a digital camera with a television image receiving function, which is a main body 5181 and a display unit 518.
2. Operation key 5183, speaker 5184, shutter button 5185, image receiving unit 518
6. Includes antenna 5187 and the like. The digital camera with a television receiver shown in FIG. 59 (H) has a function of capturing a still image. It has a function to shoot moving images. It has a function to automatically correct the captured image. It has a function to acquire various information from the antenna. It has a function to save the captured image or the information acquired from the antenna. It has a function to display the captured image or the information acquired from the antenna on the display unit. The functions of the digital camera with a television receiver shown in FIG. 59 (H) are not limited to this, and can have various functions.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (A) to 59 (E), the electronic device according to the present invention is characterized by having a display unit for displaying some information. The electronic device according to the present invention can reduce the operation frequency of the circuit by storing the data in the memory when the data is duplicated, so that the power consumption is small and the battery can be driven for a long time. is there.
Next, an application example of the display device according to the present invention will be described.

FIG. 60 shows an example in which the display device according to the present invention is provided integrally with the building. FIG. 60
Indicates a building including a housing 5200, a display panel 5201, a speaker unit 5202, and the like. Reference numeral 5203 is a remote control device for operating the display panel 5201.

The pixels described in the above embodiment are used for the display panel 5201. According to the present invention, a display panel having excellent viewing angle characteristics and high display quality can be obtained. Further, the cost can be reduced by using the same conductive type transistor for the transistor constituting the pixel portion and the amorphous semiconductor for the semiconductor layer of the transistor.

Since the display device shown in FIG. 60 is provided integrally with the structure, it can be installed without requiring a large space.

FIG. 61 shows another example in which the display device according to the present invention is provided integrally with the building. The display panel 5301 is attached integrally with the unit bath 5302, and the bather can view the display panel 5301 while taking a bath. Information can be displayed on the display panel 5301 by being operated by the bather. Therefore, it has a function that can be used as an advertisement or an entertainment means.

The pixels described in the above embodiment are used for the display panel 5301. According to the present invention, a display panel having excellent viewing angle characteristics and high display quality can be obtained. Further, the cost can be reduced by using the same conductive type transistor for the transistor constituting the pixel portion and the amorphous semiconductor for the semiconductor layer of the transistor.

The display device according to the present invention can be provided integrally not only with the side wall of the unit bath 5302 shown in FIG. 61 but also with various places. For example, it may be provided integrally with a part of the mirror surface or the bathtub itself. Further, the shape of the display device may be matched to the shape of the mirror surface or the bathtub.

FIG. 62 shows another example in which the display device according to the present invention is provided integrally with the building.
In FIG. 62, the display panel 5402 is curved to match the curved surface of the columnar body 5401. Here, the columnar body 5401 will be described as a utility pole.

The display panel 5402 shown in FIG. 62 is provided at a position higher than the human viewpoint. By installing the display panel 5402 in a building that is repeatedly forested outdoors such as a utility pole, information can be provided to an unspecified number of viewers via the display panel 5402. Therefore, it is suitable to use the display panel as an advertisement. Further, since the display panel 5402 can display the same image by external control and it is easy to switch the image instantly, extremely efficient information display and advertising effect can be expected. In addition, the display panel 5
By providing the 402 with a self-luminous display element, it can be said that it is useful as a display medium having high visibility even at night. Further, by installing the display panel 5402 on a utility pole, the display panel 5
It is easy to secure the power supply means of 402. Also, in the event of an emergency such as a disaster,
It can also be a means of quickly and accurately communicating information to disaster victims.

The pixels described in the above embodiment are used in the display panel 5402. According to the present invention, a display panel having excellent viewing angle characteristics and high display quality can be obtained. Further, the cost can be reduced by using the same conductive type transistor for the transistor constituting the pixel portion and the amorphous semiconductor for the semiconductor layer of the transistor. Further, an organic transistor provided on a film-shaped substrate may be used.

In the present embodiment, the wall, the unit bath, and the like as a structure integrated with the display device of the present invention.
Although the columnar body is illustrated, it can be installed in various other structures.

Next, an example in which the display device according to the present invention is provided integrally with a moving object will be described.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example in which the display device according to the present invention is provided integrally with an automobile. The display panel 5502 is provided integrally with the vehicle body 5501 of the automobile, and can display the operation of the vehicle body and the information input from inside and outside the vehicle body on demand. Further, the display panel 5502 may have a navigation function.

The pixels described in the above embodiment are used in the display panel 5502. According to the present invention, a display panel having excellent viewing angle characteristics and high display quality can be obtained. Further, the cost can be reduced by using the same conductive type transistor for the transistor constituting the pixel portion and the amorphous semiconductor for the semiconductor layer of the transistor.

The display device according to the present invention can be provided not only in the vehicle body 5501 shown in FIG. 63 but also in various places. For example, it may be provided integrally with a glass window, a door, a handle, a shift lever, a seat, a rearview mirror, or the like. At this time, the shape of the display panel 5502 may match the shape of the object to be installed.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example in which the display device according to the present invention is provided integrally with the train vehicle.

FIG. 64A is a diagram showing an example in which a display panel 5602 is provided on the glass of the door 5601 of a train vehicle. Compared to conventional paper advertisements, there is an advantage that the labor cost required for switching advertisements is not required. Further, since the display panel 5602 can instantly switch the image displayed on the display unit by a signal from the outside, for example, the image of the display panel can be displayed at each time zone when the passengers of the train passengers change. You can switch.
By switching images instantly in this way, more effective advertising effects can be expected.

FIG. 64B is a diagram showing an example in which a display panel 5602 is provided on the glass window 5603 and the ceiling 5604 in addition to the glass of the door 5601 of the train vehicle. As described above, since the display device according to the present invention can be easily installed in a place where it has been difficult to install in the past, an effective advertising effect can be obtained. Further, since the display device according to the present invention can instantly switch the image displayed on the display unit by the signal from the outside, it is possible to reduce the cost and time incurred when switching the advertisement, and it is more flexible. It is possible to operate and transmit information on various advertisements.

The display panel 5602 shown in FIG. 64 uses the pixels described in the above embodiment. According to the present invention, a display panel having excellent viewing angle characteristics and high display quality can be obtained. Further, the cost can be reduced by using the same conductive type transistor for the transistor constituting the pixel portion and the amorphous semiconductor for the semiconductor layer of the transistor.

Further, the display device according to the present invention is not limited to the above, and can be provided in various places. For example, a strap, a seat, a handrail, a floor, or the like may be provided integrally with a display device according to the present invention. At this time, the shape of the display panel 5602 may be matched to the shape of the object to be installed.

FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example in which the display device according to the present invention is provided integrally with a passenger airplane.

FIG. 65A is a diagram showing a shape of a display panel 5702 when it is provided on the ceiling 5701 above the seat of a passenger airplane. The display panel 5702 has a hinge portion 570.
It is provided integrally with the ceiling 5701 via No. 3, and the expansion and contraction of the hinge portion 5703 allows passengers to view the display panel 5702 at a desired position. Information can be displayed on the display panel 5702 by being operated by the passenger. Therefore, it has a function that can be used as an advertisement or an entertainment means. Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the hinge portion is bent to 570 the ceiling.
By storing in 1, safety at the time of takeoff and landing can be considered. By turning on the display element of the display panel 5702 in an emergency, it can also be used as an information transmission means and a guide light.

The display panel 5702 shown in FIG. 65 uses the pixels described in the above embodiment. According to the present invention, a display panel having excellent viewing angle characteristics and high display quality can be obtained. Further, the cost can be reduced by using the same conductive type transistor for the transistor constituting the pixel portion and the amorphous semiconductor for the semiconductor layer of the transistor.

The display device according to the present invention can be provided integrally not only with the ceiling 5701 shown in FIG. 65 but also with various places. For example, it may be provided integrally with a seat, a seat table, an armrest, a window, or the like. In addition, a large display panel that can be viewed by a large number of people at the same time may be installed on the wall of the aircraft. At this time, the shape of the display panel 5702 may be matched to the shape of the object to be installed.

In the present embodiment, the train vehicle body, the automobile body, and the airplane body are exemplified as the moving body, but the present invention is not limited to these, and the motorcycle and the motorcycle (including automobiles, buses, etc.)
, Trains (including monorails, railroads, etc.), ships, etc. can be applied. Since the display device according to the present invention can instantly switch the display of the display panel in the moving body by a signal from the outside, the moving body can be disabled by installing the display device according to the present invention on the moving body. It can be used as an advertisement display board for a specific number of customers, an information display board in the event of a disaster, and the like.

In addition, although it has been described using various figures in this embodiment, the contents described in each figure (
(May be part) applies, combines, and applies to the content (may be part) described in another figure.
Alternatively, it can be replaced freely. Further, in the figures described so far, more figures can be formed by combining different parts with respect to each part.

Similarly, the content (which may be a part) described in each figure of the present embodiment is applied and combined with the content (which may be a part) described in the drawings of another embodiment and the embodiment. , Or can be replaced freely. Further, in the figure of the present embodiment, more figures can be constructed by combining the parts of another embodiment and the example with respect to each part.

In addition, in this embodiment, the contents (may be a part) described in other embodiments and examples are used.
An example when it is embodied, an example when it is slightly deformed, an example when it is partially changed, an example when it is improved, an example when it is described in detail, an example when it is applied, and an example about related parts. And so on. Therefore, the contents described in the other embodiments and examples can be freely applied, combined, or replaced with the present embodiment.

11 node 30 TFT
3a Scanning line 6a Data line (signal line)
100 Wiring 111 Switch 112 Switch 113 Switch 114 First resistance 115 Second resistance 116 Signal line 117 Scan line 118 Common electrode 119 Cs line 121 First liquid crystal element 122 Second liquid crystal element 131 First holding capacity 132 First Holding capacity of 2 141 Node 142 Node 211 1st transistor 212 2nd transistor 213 3rd transistor 313 3rd transistor 414 Transistor 511 Signal line drive circuit 512 Scanning line drive circuit 513 Pixel part 514 Pixel 614 Transistor 800 Node 801 Unit 814 Transistor 823 Liquid crystal element 833 Holding capacity 116a Signal line 117a Scan line 119a Cs line 1200 Pixel 1219 Potential supply line 1300 Signal line switching circuit 1316 Wiring 1319 Wiring 1400 Unit 1401 Inverter 1402 Wiring 1402 Wiring 1403 Wiring 1404 Transistor 1405 Transistor 1406 Transistor 1406 Transistor 1430 Wiring 1601 Third holding capacity 1701 Third holding capacity 1801 Third holding capacity 1802 Node 1803 Node 1804 Transistor 1901 Holding capacity 1902 Node 900a Sub pixel 900b Sub pixel 1000a Sub pixel 1000b Sub pixel 1100a Sub pixel 1100b Sub pixel

Claims (6)

A first transistor, a second transistor, a third transistor, a first liquid crystal element has a plurality of said pixels having a second liquid crystal element, to one pixel,
The first liquid crystal element has a first pixel electrode and has a first pixel electrode.
The second liquid crystal element has a second pixel electrode and has a second pixel electrode.
One of the source or drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode.
One of the source or drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode.
One of the source or drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to one of the source or drain of the third transistor.
The other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to the source line,
The gate of the pre-Symbol first transistor is electrically connected to a gate of said second transistor,
Different voltages are applied to the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element,
The first conductive layer that functions as one of the source or drain of the second transistor is a liquid crystal display device having a region that functions as one of the source or drain of the third transistor. A first transistor, a second transistor, a third transistor, a first liquid crystal element has a plurality of said pixels having a second liquid crystal element, to one pixel,
The first liquid crystal element has a first pixel electrode and has a first pixel electrode.
The second liquid crystal element has a second pixel electrode and has a second pixel electrode.
One of the source or drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to the first pixel electrode.
One of the source or drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to the second pixel electrode.
One of the source or drain of the second transistor is electrically connected to one of the source or drain of the third transistor.
The other of the source and the drain of the first transistor is electrically connected to the source line,
The gate of the pre-Symbol first transistor is electrically connected to the gate of the previous SL second transistor,
Different voltages are applied to the first liquid crystal element and the second liquid crystal element,
The first conductive layer that functions as one of the source or drain of the second transistor has a region that functions as one of the source or drain of the third transistor.
The first conductive layer is a liquid crystal display device having a region in contact with the second pixel electrode. In claim 1 or 2,
It has a gate wire that functions as the gate of the first transistor.
It has a Cs line that extends along the direction in which the gate line extends.
A second conductive layer that functions as the source or drain of the third transistor is a liquid crystal display device having a region that overlaps with the Cs line. In claim 1 or 2 ,
It has a gate wire that functions as the gate of the first transistor.
A liquid crystal display device in which the gate line has a portion that overlaps with the first transistor and has a large width and a portion that does not overlap with the first transistor and has a small width in a top view. In any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first pixel electrode and the second pixel electrode have translucency and are transparent.
The liquid crystal display device is a transmissive liquid crystal display device. In any one of claims 1 to 5,
The ratio of the channel width to the channel length of the first transistor is larger than the ratio of the channel width to the channel length of the third transistor.
A liquid crystal display device in which the ratio of the channel width to the channel length of the second transistor is larger than the ratio of the channel width to the channel length of the third transistor.

Images